Vivid s5 инструкция по эксплуатации на русском - Самые разные инструкции по применению

Manuals
Brands
GE Manuals
Medical Equipment
Vivid S5
User manual

Contents
Table of Contents
Bookmarks

Quick Links

GE Medical Systems

Technical

Publications

Vivid S5/Vivid S6

User Manual

Volume 1

Direction R2424458-100

Rev. 2

Operating Documentation

Related Manuals for GE Vivid S5

Summary of Contents for GE Vivid S5

Page 1
GE Medical Systems Technical Publications Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual Volume 1 Direction R2424458-100 Rev. 2 Operating Documentation Copyright © 2010 By General Electric Co.
Page 2
This product complies with regulatory requirements of the following European Directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices. This manual is a reference for the Vivid S5 and Vivid S6. It applies to all versions of the 10.2.x software for the Vivid S5 and Vivid S6 ultrasound systems.
Page 3: Table Of Contents

Notice against user modification……… 18 Regulatory information …………… 19 Directives …………….19 Product Classifications …………19 Conformity to Standards …………. 19 Certifications …………… 21 Software License Acknowledgements …….. 21 Device labels…………….22 Label Locations…………..22 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 4
Use of Electrosurgical Unit …………41 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ……..42 EMC performance ……………43 Declaration of Emissions…………. 44 Declaration of Immunity…………44 Notice upon Installation of Product……..44 General notice …………..45 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 5
Wheels…………….64 Moving the unit …………..64 Transporting the unit…………66 Reinstalling at a new location ……….67 Preparing Vivid S5/Vivid S6 for scanning ……67 Unit acclimation time…………68 System description …………..69 System overview…………..69 Control panel …………..71 The Scanning screen…………
Page 6
Adjusting the display of the ECG trace……126 Annotations …………….128 To insert an annotation…………128 To edit annotation………….. 131 To erase annotation …………131 Configuration of the pre-defined annotation list….132 Bodymarks ……………. 134 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 7
Strain rate controls…………179 Using Strain rate …………… 181 Optimizing Strain rate …………181 Strain ………………183 Strain overview …………..183 Strain controls…………..184 Using Strain …………..186 Optimizing Strain ………….. 186 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 8
Editing/creating a template …………225 Entering the Template editor screen ………225 Template editor screen overview ……..226 Editing/Creating a template ……….229 Chapter 6 Contrast Imaging Introduction …………….234 Cardiac imaging …………..234 Non-cardiac imaging …………235 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 9
M-Mode Measurements………… 308 Doppler measurements ………… 309 Pediatric Calculations …………… 314 Overview…………….314 Hip Dysplasia Calculation ……….315 Making Hip Dysplasia Measurement …….. 315 Performing an OB exam…………317 Patient entry…………..317 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 10
Introduction……………. 370 To Start a Gynecology Exam ……….370 B-Mode Measurements………….. 371 Uterus length, width, and height……..371 Ovary length, width, and height……… 372 Follicle measurements length, width, and height ….373 viii Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 11
Optimizing the trace display…………. 394 Optimizing the Y-axis…………394 Trace smoothing …………… 395 Switching modes or traces…………397 To switch mode…………..397 To switch trace…………..397 Cine compound …………….. 398 Anatomical M-Mode…………..399 Introduction …………… 399 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 12
Disk Management…………… 464 Configuring the Disk management function …… 465 Running the Disk management function ……468 Data Backup and Restore ……….471 DICOM spooler …………….479 Starting the DICOM spooler ……….479 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 13
Designing a report template……….519 Saving the report template……….530 To exit the Report designer ……….530 Report templates management ……….531 Configuration of the Template selection menu ….532 Export/Import of Report templates……..533 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 14
Table of Contents Chapter 11 Probes Probe overview…………….537 Supported probes………….. 537 Vivid S5 Probe/Application Overview …….. 542 Vivid S6 Probe/Application Overview …….. 543 Maximum probe temperature ……….544 Probe orientation …………… 545 Probe labelling…………..546 Environmental Requirements ……….547 Probe Integration …………… 548 Selecting probes…………..
Page 15
The Modify Calculations sheet……….604 Parameter configuration ……….. 604 The OB table sheet…………605 Report ………………611 The diagnostic codes sheet ……….612 The Comment texts sheet……….613 Connectivity …………….616 Dataflow…………….616 xiii Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 16
System self-test…………….646 System malfunction …………646 Using InSite ExC ……………. 650 InSite ExC Functionalities ……….650 Initiating a Request for Service (RFS)……. 650 Clinical Lifeline Mode …………653 Exiting InSite ExC………….. 654 Index Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 17: Revision History

Please verify that you are using the latest revision of this document. If you need to know the latest revision, contact your distributor, local GE Sales Representative or in the USA call the GE Medical Systems Clinical Answer Center at: 1-800-682-5327 or 1-262-524-5698.
Page 18
Revision History Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 19: Attention

Vivid S6 offers additional modes, like TVI or Tissue Tracking, and options like TSI (Tissue Synchronization Imaging) and SI/SRI (Strain/Strain-rate imaging. The fully digital architecture of the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 unit allows optimal usage of all scanning modes and probe types, throughout the full spectrum of operating frequencies.
Page 20: Principles Of Operation

A sophisticated system design with computer controlled extensive features and functions make the Vivid S5 and Vivid S6 easy systems to use and very user friendly. Interference caution Use of devices that transmit radio waves near the unit could cause it to malfunction.
Page 21: Indications For Use

Medical staff in charge of the unit are required to instruct technicians, patients, and other people who may be around the unit, to fully comply with the above recommendations. Indications for use The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 ultrasound unit is intended for the following applications: • Abdominal •…
Page 22: Manual Contents

The CD-ROM includes English and all translations. Paper documentation may be ordered. The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 documentation is written for users who are familiar with basic ultrasound principles and techniques. They do not include sonographic training or detailed clinical procedures.
Page 23: Conventions Used In This Manual

Vivid S5 systems. Indicates that the relevant feature exists in the standard configuration of Vivid S6 and is available as an option on Vivid S5. Indicates that the relevant feature exists in the standard configuration of Vivid S5 and is not available on Vivid S6.
Page 24: Regulatory Requirements

• Minor injury CAUTION • Property damage Regulatory requirements The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 ultrasound unit confirms to directives, classifications, and standards, as described in «Regulatory information» on page 19. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 25: Contact Information

(262) 524-5698 Center. In other locations, contact your local Applications, Sales or Service Representative. Service Questions For service in the United States, call GE CARES Tel: (1) 800-437-1171 In other locations, contact your local Service Representative. Accessories Catalog Requests…
Page 26
Miranda 5237 Fax: (1) 567-2678 Buenos Aires — 1407 Austria General Electric Austria GmbH Tel: +43 1 972 72-0 Euro Plaza, Geb. E, Technologiestr. 10 Fax: +43 1 972 72-2222 A-1120 Vienna, Austria Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 27
Fax: (49) 212.28.02.431 Beethovenstraße 239 Postfach 11 05 60 D-42655 Solingen Greece GE Medical Systems Hellas AP. Τηλ.: +30 210 9690990 Λεωφόρος Κύπρου 156 AP. Φαξ: +30 210 9625931 TΚ 164 51, ΑΡΓΥΡΟΥΠΟΛΗ Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 28
Via Galeno 36 Fax: +39 0226001599 20126 Milano Luxembourg Tel: 0800 2603 toll free Mexico GE Sistemas Médicos de Mexico S.A. de C.V. Tel: (5) 228-9600 Rio Lerma #302, 1° y 2° Pisos Fax: (5) 211-4631 Colonia Cuauhtémoc 06500-México, D.F.
Page 29
Tel: int. code + 33 1 39 20 0007 Manufacturer GE Medical Systems, Israel, Ltd. Tel: (+972) 4851 9555 Einstein Bldg 4, Etgar st. Fax: (+972) 4851 9500 P.O. Box 2006 Tirat Carmel 39120, Israel Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 30
Introduction Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 31: Safety

• Acoustic Output Considerations …………. 30 • Concerns surrounding fetal exposure ……..30 • Patient safety ………………31 • Patient identification …………..31 • Diagnostic information …………..31 • Patient guidance ……………. 32 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 32
• Peripheral Update for EC countries ……….46 • Patient Environmental Devices …………48 • Acceptable devices …………..49 • Unapproved devices …………..49 • Accessories, options, and supplies ……….49 • Environmental protection …………50 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 33: Introduction

Other precautions or prudent-use recommendations are indicated in the note sections in the left column. These are: • Use of the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 ultrasound unit as a prescription device, under the order of a physician. • Maintaining an optimum unit environment.
Page 34: Hazard Symbols

• Risk of explosion if used in • Flammable anesthetic the presence of flammable anesthetics • Patient/user injury or • Replacing fuses adverse reaction from fire or • Outlet guidelines smoke • Patient/user injury from explosion and fire Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 35: Owner Responsibility

The owner of the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 ultrasound unit should ensure that only properly trained, fully qualified personnel are authorized to operate the system. Before authorizing anyone to…
Page 36: Important Safety Considerations

User modification may cause safety hazards and degradation in system performance. All modification must be done by a GE qualified person. The equipment is not suitable for use in the presence of flammable anesthetic mixture with air or with Oxygen or Nitrous Oxide.
Page 37: Regulatory Information

The location of the CE marking is specified in «Device labels» on page 22. Product Classifications The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 ultrasound unit confirms to the following classifications, in accordance with the IEC/EN 60601-1:6.8.1: • According to 93/42/EEC Medical Device Directive, this is Class IIa Medical Device.
Page 38
• UL 60601-1 Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1 General Requirements for Safety. • Canadian Standards Association (CSA). • CSA 22.2, 601.1 Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1 General Requirements for Safety. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 39: Certifications

Department of Health, USA). Certifications • Quality management standards for medical devices: General Electric Medical Systems is ISO 9001 and ISO13485 certified. Software License Acknowledgements • WindowBlinds ™ OCX © Stardock ® Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 40: Device Labels

Safety Device labels Label Locations Label 1 — Vivid S5 100-120V Label 2 — Vivid S5 220-240V Label 3 — Vivid S6 100-120V Label 4 — Vivid S6 220-240V Label 5 — Universal Label, for all systems Vivid S5/Vivid S6 label locations…
Page 41: Label Icon Description

Please contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 42
This marking on the control panel is especially intended to alert the user to consult the user manual for use BEFORE operation of the system. CAUTION — Dangerous voltage: used Various to indicate electric shock hazards. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 43
Russian Federation No. 184-FZ. The field 0000 will contain the number of the institute that issued the GOST label. Prescription Device Label for United Bottom of unit States per 21 CFR 801.109(b)(1) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 44: Acoustic Output

Once an optimal image is achieved, the need for increasing acoustic output or prolonging the exposure cannot be justified. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 45: Safety Statement

Although no harmful biological effects have been demonstrated for ultrasound frequencies, intensities and exposure times used in examination with the GE Vivid S5/Vivid S6 system, GE Medical Systems recommends using the lowest acoustic output settings which will produce diagnostically acceptable information.
Page 46
The user can override the default settings, but care should be taken to observe the displayed MI and TI values. Power It is possible to change the power in all operating modes so that the operator can use the ALARA principle. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 47: Ob Exam

Ultrasound examinations performed solely to satisfy the family’s desire to know the fetal sex, to view the fetus, or to obtain a picture of the fetus should be discouraged. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 48: Acoustic Output Considerations

Safety Acoustic Output Considerations The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 system is a multi-use device which is capable of exceeding FDA Pre-enactment acoustic output (spatial peak-temporal average) intensity limits for fetal WARNING applications. It is prudent to conduct an exam with the minimum amount and duration of acoustic output necessary to optimize the image’s diagnostic value.
Page 49: Patient Safety

These limitations must be considered before making any decision based on quantitative values. If in doubt, the nearest GE Medical Systems Service Office should be consulted. Equipment malfunction or incorrect settings can result in measurement errors or failure to detect details in the image.
Page 50: Patient Guidance

Observe immersion levels as displayed in Figure 11-5, page 559. Inspect probes for sharp edges or rough surfaces that could WARNING injure sensitive tissue. DO NOT bend or pull the cable forcefully, to avoid mechanical shock or impact to the probe. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 51: Electrical Hazard

Become familiar with the use and care precautions described in Chapter 11, «Probes» on page 535. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 52: Biological Hazards

DO NOT apply excessive force to the probe cable, to prevent insulation failure. Electrical leakage checks should be performed regularly by a GE service representative or qualified hospital personnel, according to the procedures described in EN 60601-1/IEC 60601-1 §19.
Page 53: Personnel And Equipment Safety

Connect the attachment plug to a hospital-grade grounding outlet to ensure adequate grounding. • Never use any adaptor or converter of a three-prong-to two-prong type to connect with a mains power plug. The protective earth connection will loosen. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 54: Smoke And Fire Hazard

Fuses blown within 36 hours of being replaced may indicate a malfunctioning electrical circuit within the system. In this event, the unit must be checked by GE Medical Systems service personnel. No attempt should be made to replace the fuses with others of a higher rating.
Page 55: Lcd Monitor

Archived data is managed at the individual sites. Performing data backup (to any device) is recommended. CAUTION Do not unpack the Vivid S5/Vivid S6. This must be performed by qualified service personnel only. CAUTION Do not use the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 Ultrasound system ECG wave for diagnosis and monitoring.
Page 56
Call a Service Representative for information. • DO NOT scratch or press on the panel with any sharp objects, such as a pencil or pen, as this may result in damage to the panel. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 57: Electrical Safety

Suitable electrical isolation of such external AC outlets may be required in order to meet UL2601-1 and IEC 60601-1 (1988) standards for electrical leakage. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 58: Allergic Reactions To Latex-Containing Medical Devices

Patient reaction to latex has ranged from contact urticaria, to systemic anaphylaxis. For more details regarding allergic reaction to latex, refer to FDA Medical Alert MDA91-1, March 29, 1991 Medical Alert on latex products. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 59: Use Of Ecg

Safety Use of ECG Do not use the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 Ultrasound system ECG wave for diagnosis and monitoring. CAUTION Use of Defibrillator Do not use the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 Ultrasound system with Defibrillator. This equipment does not have defibrillator- approved applied parts.
Page 60: Electromagnetic Compatibility (Emc)

To comply with the regulations on electromagnetic interference, all interconnecting cables to peripheral devices must be shielded and properly grounded. Use of cables not properly shielded and grounded may result in the equipment causing or Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 61: Emc Performance

Portable and mobile radio communications equipment (e.g. two-way radio, cellular/cordless telephones, wireless computer networks), other than those supplied by GE, should be used no closer to any part of this system, including cables, than determined according to the following method:…
Page 62: Declaration Of Emissions

(cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast, and TV broadcast transmitter cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 63: General Notice

RF shielded examination room may be necessary. Use either power supply cords provided by GE Medical Systems or ones designated by GE Medical Systems. Products equipped with a power source plug should be plugged into the fixed power socket which has the protective grounding conductor.
Page 64: Peripheral Update For Ec Countries

60950 compliant modem using one of the serial or USB ports on the system. The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 may also be used safely while connected to devices other than those recommended above if the devices and their specifications, installation, and interconnection with the system conform to the requirements of IEC/EN 60601-1-1.
Page 65
Safety connect to Vivid S5/Vivid S6 and are used simultaneously, must be less than or equal to the rated supply of the Vivid S5/Vivid S6. • There must be adequate heat dissipation and ventilation to prevent overheating of the device.
Page 66: Patient Environmental Devices

25. LOGIQ Probe Connector (Vivid S6 only) 8. Ground Line 26. Non-imaging Pencil Probe Connector 9. Power Line (AC~) 27. ECG connector 10. DVD Drive 11. Hard-Copy Printer Figure 1-2: Patient Environmental Devices Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 67: Acceptable Devices

If devices are connected without the approval of GE, the warranty CAUTION will be INVALID. Any device connected to the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 must conform to one or more of the requirements listed below: • IEC standard or equivalent standards appropriate to devices.
Page 68: Environmental Protection

This product consists of devices that may contain mercury, which must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local, state, or country laws. (Within this system, the backlight lamps in the monitor display contain mercury.) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 69: Getting Started

• Starting an examination …………..95 • Creating a new Patient record or starting an examination from an existing patient record …………..95 • Selecting a Probe and an Application ……..100 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 70: Introduction

Request training, if needed. Ensure that unauthorized personnel do not tamper with the unit. Service representatives authorized by GE Medical Systems will unpack and install the unit. Do not attempt to install the unit alone. Never set liquids on the unit in order to avoid spillage into the unit or the control panel.
Page 71: Preparing The Unit For Use

Getting started Preparing the unit for use The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 ultrasound unit must operate within the proper environment and in accordance with the requirements described in this section. Before using the system, ensure that the requirements are met. Site requirements…
Page 72: Connecting The Unit

A GE-qualified person should perform the initial system the unit in an inap- installation. propriate environ- ment can cause Connecting the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 ultrasound unit involves electronic interfer- preliminary checks of the power adaptor unit and cord, voltage ence to radios and television sets situ- level and compliance with electrical safety requirements.
Page 73
Voltage level check Check the label near the circuit breaker on the rear side of the system (Figure 2-1 or Figure 2-2). Figure 2-1: Vivid S5 rating labels Figure 2-2: Vivid S6 rating labels Check the voltage range indicated on the label: •…
Page 74
Getting started Connecting to the electrical outlet POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCUR. The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 requires a dedicated single branch circuit. To avoid circuit overload and possible loss of critical care equipment, make sure you DO NOT WARNING have other equipment operating on the same circuit.
Page 75
(such as watch authorized batteries). Used batteries should not be placed with common field-service engi- neer. household waste products. Contact local authorities for the location of a chemical waste collection program nearest you. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 76
Vivid S5/Vivid S6 peripherals and accessories can be properly tion on peripherals. connected using the rear connector panel. Use only approved peripherals, accessories or probes. DO NOT connect any accessories or probes without approval by GE CAUTION Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 77
IEC 60601-1-1 (2000). If in doubt, consult the technical service department or your local representative. Do not touch the conducting parts of the USB or Ethernet cables when connecting equipment to the unit. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 78
Signal type Device type Note DVI-I Out DVI-I output high External monitor resolution video Universal serial USB Cable / bus x2 Device Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX Network device Ethernet IEEE 8023 Network device Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 79: Switching On/Off

ID is USR and associated passwords can be configured in the there is no need to Vivid S5/Vivid S6. See «Presets and System setup» on enter a password page 583 for more information. If IDs and passwords have been entered and «Use Auto Logon»…
Page 80
5. Cancel: Cancel Log on Figure 2-7: Operator Login Window Switching off the unit When the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 is switched off, the system performs an automatic shutdown sequence. The unit can be switched off into one of three states.
Page 81
When the system is operating normally, if the AC power is interrupted or the power cable is removed from the wall outlet the screen and keyboard will turn off, but the rest of the system Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 82: Moving And Transporting The Unit

Turn system Off to Full shut-down or Standby mode. Remove the AC plug from the power outlet. Wrap the AC power cord to ensure cord is not hanging in the wheel area or beyond the sides of the system. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 83
Grasp the front handle grips and push or pull or use the rear handle bar for pushing the system. Do not attempt to move the unit using cables or probe connectors. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 84: Transporting The Unit

Ensure that the unit is secured inside the vehicle. Secure it with straps to prevent movement while in transit. Drive cautiously to prevent vibration damage. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 85: Reinstalling At A New Location

(see «Moving and transporting the unit» on page 64). Follow the installation procedure described on «Connecting the unit» on page 54. Preparing Vivid S5/Vivid S6 for scanning Lock front Wheel brakes Un-Wrap the AC power cord and plug into power source.
Page 86: Unit Acclimation Time

Acclimation will take one hour for each 2.5 C increment when the unit’s temperature is below 10 C or above 40 42.5 36.5 45.5 108.5 Hours 47.5 52.5 57.5 117.5 126.5 135.5 Hours Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 87: System Description

Getting started System description System overview Figure 2-10: Vivid S5/Vivid S6 System Overview Note: Above figure is Vivid S6. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 88
19. Pencil probe socket 20. ECG connector socket: Also supporting the external ECG input 21. Large probe socket: (Available on Vivid S6 only) Supporting the TEE probes only 22. RS-Socket locking latch Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 89: Control Panel

Getting started Control panel The following pictures illustrate the layout of the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 control panel. The buttons and controls are grouped together for ease of use. A detailed description of the buttons is provided on the following pages.
Page 90
Displays the Select Probe and Application dialog box that enables the users to select the desired probe and application preset for the current examination. For information about selecting probes, refer to page 100 and page 535. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 91
Image Review screen where bigger previews of the images are shown for image selection. Refer to page 426 for details on the review of images. Displays the examination report. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 92
M-Mode scans. If TVI is on, the Doppler modes (PW/CW) will also be optimized for tissue velocity. For further information, refer to page 169. Note: TVI is optional on Vivid S5. The TVI button is always installed even if option is not installed. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual…
Page 93
Six sliding keys that compensate for depth-related attenuation in an image. The upper slider corresponds to the smallest depth. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 94
Automatic Spectrum Optimization to optimize the Doppler spectrum. Flex This button can be configured to function as any button on the keyboard (see page 590). Note: with the exception of alphanumeric and soft-menu sections. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 95
Same arrows are used while reviewing images from clipboard, the active frame may be stepped forward or backwards to review the next or previous image. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 96
Prints the current imaging screen content to a selected (configurable) printer. For more information about printing (see page 577). The key can also be configured for alternative PRINT storing of images (see page 623). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 97
Depending on the situation (see Figure 3-3, page 109): • Performs the selected control or highlighted menu item. • Toggles between the Trackball functions within the active group. The key is duplicated for ergonomic reasons. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 98
The assigned functions are indicated above the button on the LCD display. The mode-specific functions for these buttons are described in Chapter 4, «Scanning Modes» on page 137. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 99
To activate LCD adjustments controlled by softkeys. Biopsy Displays the biopsy path marker. Bodymark Displays the available body marks for the current application. Page Erase Erases all previously-typed annotations (and body marks). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 100
(see Chapter 14, «Adding Problem description» on page 646). Alt+B Allows to insert a «bookmark» into the system failure log («Adding bookmarks» on page 646) Shift+Config Allows to run various diagnostics. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 101
+ PgUp or forward or backwards. PgDn Alt + F1 Activates the “Front-panel Simulator” for the use of system-diagnostics. Do not activate this function. It is to be used only by a service representative. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 102: The Scanning Screen

12. Soft menu window 29. Probe orientation marker 13. Clipboard navigator 30. Measurement result table (measurement mode) 14. Cine progress bar 31. Logo 15. Current menu name Figure 2-12: The scanning screen Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 103
• Heart rate (HR) DVR Status and counter indicators Displays the DVR counter as it changes in real time, and a status icon, which indicates the current operating status of the DVR. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 104
The status bar Consists of four information fields as follows: Service «Insite Express Connection» (ExC) icon Enable access to the GE Healthcare on-line service center. Connectivity status icon Displays the network status: Connected or disconnected. Prompt/status field Displays system messages or prompts the user for actions.
Page 105: Three-Pedal Footswitch Operation

RS, one imaging probe port type OR, and one pencil probe port. The connector panel situated in the front of the Vivid S5 has three imaging probe ports type RS and one pencil probe port.
Page 106
Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place. Rotate the locking handle to the full vertical position to lock in place. Cable Handling Take the following precaution with probe cables: • Do not bend the cable acutely. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 107
First place the probe connector into the carrying case • Carefully wind the cable into the carrying case. • Carefully place the probe head into the carrying case. DO NOT use excessive force or impact the probe face. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 108: Adjusting The Display Monitor

This is the main control to adjust screen brightness to compensate for different ambient light. When soft-rotary is rotated the brightness adjustment tool appears at bottom of screen, as shown in Figure 2-14. Figure 2-14: Brightness control Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 109
It will allow you to optimize Contrast / Brightness and blue-tint to suit the particular external display. When the button is de-activated, the previous settings that were optimized for the internal display will be restored. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 110
Do NOT place objects on the monitor. CAUTION To swivel the LCD monitor Grab the left and right sides of the LCD monitor frame and swivel the monitor to the desired position. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 111
CAUTION Figure 2-17: Monitor position adjustment Control Panel adjustment The system Control panel can be freely adjusted to swivel or move up/down. There are two brake handles located under the control panel. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 112
When panel is raised it also moves away from the operator. Note: When preparing the system to be moved, pull the left handle and bring the control panel to a center position. Swivel it slightly till a locking click is heard. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 113: Starting An Examination

ID and password (as explained page 637. in Figure 2-19). Note: In case the password is not known, press Emergency. This allows you to scan with the system, without accessing long-term archiving of the exam. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 114
(see page 626). the Patient list can be turned off (see If the unit is configured to display the Patient information page 626). window, follow the steps below: Enter additional patient information if required. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 115
2. Select the column heading border and drag to configured to display the Advanced search tool adjust column width. as default (see page 629). 3. Expended Patient record displaying belonging examinations. Figure 2-20: The Search/Create Patient window Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 116
4. Select patient information category. Figure 2-21: The Patient Information window 1. The patient information on the scanning screen is configurable (see page 590). Figure 2-22: The Patient information on the scanning screen Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 117
Getting started Using other ID The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 system supports an additional field for Patient ID number referred to as «Other Patient ID». This is an optional data field and may be accessed via the Patient List screen and clicking the «More» button. The rules applicable to the «Patient ID»…
Page 118: Selecting A Probe And An Application

CAUTION Check that the correct TI category is displayed (see Chapter 1, «Thermal Index» on page 26). TIB must be displayed when a fetal application is selected. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 119
• Performing measurements …………121 • To perform measurements …………121 • Physiological trace …………… .. 122 • Connecting the internal ECG ……….. 122 • Physio controls …………….. 126 • Displaying the ECG trace …………126 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 120
• Annotations ………………128 • To insert an annotation ………….128 • To edit annotation …………..131 • To erase annotation …………..131 • Configuration of the pre-defined annotation list ……132 • Bodymarks …………….134 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 121: Basic Scanning Operations

PW Doppler), one mode is active (live) while the other is frozen. In this case, the assignable keys and rotary knobs controls parameters associated with the active mode. Switching the active mode will change the key and rotary assignments accordingly. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 122: Using The Assignable Keys Soft Menu

Upon rotating the knob the arch on the graphics changes its length to reflect the change in the value of the controlled parameter. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 123
On/Off Toggle button In this example the active green indicator indicates that the “Simultan.” setting is set ON. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 124
The circular button on the bottom-right area of the screen acts as a soft-menu rocker button. It has access to a different type of soft-menu which pops up on the right portion of the screen. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 125: Using The Soft Menu Rocker

— Right arrow increases control setting. od of time it will — Left arrow decreases control setting. time-out and disap- pear from the dis- play. (See page 633 for information on how to configure timeout). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 126: Trackball Operation

Status line (Figure 3-3). To change trackball assignment • Press in the Trackball area until the desired TRACKBALL function is selected highlighted. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 127: The System Menu

2. Set key: perform the selected control or highlighted menu item 3. Update Menu key: select the operation to perform from the pop-up System menu. (Menu contents may change. Figure shows a typical menu) Figure 3-3: The Trackball area Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 128: Cineloop Operation

Cineloop overview 1. ECG 4. Right marker 2. Left marker 5. Heart rate or Cine speed (in replay) 3. Current frame 6. Cine frame number values Figure 3-4: The cineloop controls display Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 129: Cineloop Controls

When the scan mode is frozen, trackball to move the current marker and review the images Cine speed In cine replay mode, move the trackball left or right to adjust the speed of the cineloop playback. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 130: Using Cineloop

To view a cineloop frame by frame If not in freeze mode, press the button to freeze 2D FREEZE the cineloop. Use the Trackball to scroll through the cineloop frame by frame. Use the Speed/Frame softkey button. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 131: Storing Images And Cineloops

The amount of data stored in images from 2D replay is determined by the defined cineloop. Images can be stored in either DICOM and GE Raw Data formats or DICOM format only, depending on the dataflow configuration (refer to page 616 for further information).
Page 132: Removable Media

Copy of system configuration presets between to units using the Backup/Restore feature (see «Data Backup and Restore» on page 471). • Save images as JPEG or AVI for review on a regular computer. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 133: Supported Removable Media

USB Flash cards may cause interference on the system CAUTION itself or on other electronic devices. DO NOT USE devices containing embedded U3 technology programs as these might interfere with the proper operation of the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 system. CAUTION • CD-R (CD-RW is not supported.) •…
Page 134
Formatting just prior to using the media, as described in «Exporting patient records/examinations» on page 452. Preparation well ahead of time as described in the following section. The formatting process will erase any data present on the disk. CAUTION Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 135
Select Format. A confirmation window is displayed. Select OK to continue. Wait for the display of the Information window indicating that the formatting process is completed. 10. Select OK to continue. 11. Eject the media as described below. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 136
Note: Before using any of these functions, verify that the destination PC / Network has been set up with a shared folder (remote path) with user permissions. Configuring the shared folder for the first time will involve your GE field-service engineer. Save As PDF to network path Save As PDF Network Path is used for saving Reports as PDFs to a destination PC or network.
Page 137
The status of the DVR is indicated by a symbol on the Title bar (for detail about how to use DVR recorder, refer to «DVR (Digital Video Recorder)» on page 578). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 138: Zoom

Basic scanning operations Zoom The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 supports two types of zoom: the display zoom and the high resolution (HR) zoom. • The Display zoom (sometimes called «Read» zoom) magnifies the image display in both frozen and live 2D, M-Mode and combined modes.
Page 139: Performing Measurements

Basic scanning operations Performing measurements To perform measurements • Press to enter the Measurement mode. MEASURE Refer to page 243 for further information. • Press to perform simple generic measurements. CALIPER Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 140: Physiological Trace

The operator can control the gain, the position and the sweep rate of the traces using the assignables on the control panel. Use only GE Medical Systems accessories Conductive parts of electrodes and associated connectors for applied parts, including neutral electrodes should not contact other conductive CAUTION parts, including earth.
Page 141
Connect the ECG trunk cable into the rectangular-shaped socket marked ECG on the patient I/O panel. The patient I/O panel is located in the front left of the ultrasound unit (see Figure 3-7). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 142
A special adapter is available allowing the connection of pre-wired electrodes using a DIN 1.55 type connector into the «MultiLink» ™ trunk ECG cable (see Figure 3-8). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 143
Basic scanning operations Figure 3-8: DIN 1.55 type connector The electrodes should connect to their corresponding locations as shown on Figure 3-9. Figure 3-9: Electrode connections Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 144: Physio Controls

ECG PHYSIO controls. Press the assignable to display the trace. Adjusting the display of the ECG trace Adjusting the ECG trace sweep speed Press on the control panel. PHYSIO Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 145
PHYSIO Adjust the assignable button to move the trace POSITION vertically. Do not use the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 Ultrasound system ECG physio waveform for diagnosis and monitoring. CAUTION Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 146: Annotations

Trackball the text entered to the insertion position. Press to add the annotation. Pre-defined annotation Word selection from the Annotation menu Press the alphanumeric key TEXT A list of application-specific pre-defined texts is displayed (see Figure 3-10). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 147
To exchange sections order, enter the sections to swap next to Swap columns button and press Swap columns. 10. Customized text may be added to the Application pane by the special window on the lower area of the Customize sheet. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 148
ARROW DOWN To change section, Press until the desired LEFT ARROW section is displayed in the Status bar. To insert the selected pre-defined text, press RIGHT ARROW Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 149: To Edit Annotation

To erase all annotations on the screen in one operation, press the alphanumeric key PAGE ERASE To erase annotation words one at a time, hit button on DELETE the alphanumeric keyboard. Each button-press will delete a single word in reversed order. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 150: Configuration Of The Pre-Defined Annotation List

Type the new annotation text. Press add. The new annotation text is added at the end of the list. Press save to store the new annotation list. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 151
Basic scanning operations 1. Rearrange list 2. Delete selected text 3. Reset to factory default 4. Add new text to the list 5. Enter new text Figure 3-12: The Annotation Menu Configuration Dialog Box Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 152: Bodymarks

1. Probe marker Figure 3-14: The bodymark with probe marker Using the trackball, adjust the position of the probe marker and press Using the trackball, adjust the probe marker orientation and press Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 153
To change the configuration Press CONFIG In the Configuration package, select Meas/Text category. In the Meas/Text category select Annotation (see Figure 3-12). Check or uncheck the «Delete on Page erase» option. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 154
Basic scanning operations Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 155
• Optimizing PW/CW Doppler modes ……… 168 • Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI) ……….169 • Tissue Tracking ……………. 173 • Strain rate ………………178 • Strain rate overview …………..178 • Strain rate controls …………..179 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 156
• Optimizing TSI …………….192 • Additional scanning features …………193 • LogiqView …………….. 193 • Compound …………….194 • B-Flow ………………195 • Blood flow imaging …………..195 • Virtual Convex …………….196 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 157: Introduction

Scanning Modes Introduction The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 ultrasound scanner provides several basic scanning modes and several options for combining the use of these modes. The following scanning modes are described in this chapter: • 2D Mode Imaging • M-Mode Imaging •…
Page 158: 2D-Mode

Scanning Modes 2D-Mode 2D-Mode overview 1. Focus marker 2. Probe orientation marker 3. Status window 4. Soft menu Figure 4-1: The 2D screen (cardiac) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 159
5. Freeze • Tilt 6. 2D 2. Zoom 7. Gain 3. Depth Controls marked with R are also available in freeze and cine replay Figure 4-2: The 2D controls on the front panel Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 160: 2D-Mode Controls

By using this control in combination with angle control the image can be “aligned” to the direction of interest, and frame rates be optimized. By default the axis of symmetry of a 2D image is vertical. (Applicable only for cardiology applications). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 161
The combined single image has the benefits of reduced speckle noise, reduced clutter, and continuity of specular reflectors. Therefore, this technique can improve contrast resolution. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 162
ATO on or off. When activated, ATO is GAIN displayed in the information window. Depth Sets the maximum (far field) distance that will be imaged. Decreasing the depth may allow higher frame rates. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 163
Frequency/Transmit Pattern, taking into account the different frequency-preference as set by the manual modification by the user. With Smart Depth turned OFF, the Frequency control setting will remain unchanged even when depth setting is changed. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 164
Extra care must be taken to select the optimal Speckle reduction level. Ultra Definition (UD) Speckle Reduce This control is used to reduce the amount of speckle in non-cardiology applications. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 165
The label CLR appears in white whenever «Clear Vessel» is active, and becomes dark-gray whenever «Clear Vessel» is not active, because scanning conditions do not allow «Clear Vessel» to detect the vessel correctly (Figure 4-3). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 166: Using 2D

The following controls can be adjusted to optimize the 2D Mode display: • Use the Gain and TGC controls to optimize the overall image. • Use the Depth control to adjust the range to be imaged. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 167
In particular it turns on while placing the focus marker at relatively large depth. Wide aperture automatically turns off when focus is moved to a shallow region. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 168: M-Mode

Figure 4-4: The cardiac M-Mode screen (top/bottom) This unit has three types of M-Mode: • Conventional M-Mode (MM): displays a distance/time plot of a cursor line in the axial plane of the 2D-image. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 169: M-Mode Controls

Note: While changing the Frequency value on display, the in the status win- operator actually selects different transmit patterns associated dow. with that value, which includes transmit pulse shape, frequency and transmit sequence. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 170
Adjust reject level. When this control is increased, low-level echoes are rejected and appear darker in the image. An index number is displayed in the status window to indicate the relative level of rejection. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 171: Using M-Mode

Use the trackball to position the cursor over the required area of the image. Adjust horizontal sweep, Gain, Frequency, Focus, Dynamic Range, Compression and Contour to optimize the display if necessary. Press to stop imaging. FREEZE Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 172
The Trackball as- signable Pos is acti- desired position along the cursor line. vated. Repeat steps 4. and 5. to change the angle of the solid cursor line if necessary. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 173: Optimizing M-Mode

Adjust Dynamic range to optimize the useful range of incoming echoes to the available greyscale. • Adjust Compress and Contour to further optimize the display. • Adjust Reject to reduce noise while taking care not to Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 174
Scanning Modes eliminate significant low-level diagnostic information. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 175: Color Mode

Scanning Modes Color Mode Color Mode overview 1. Probe orientation marker 2. Color bar 3. Color sector marker 4. Status window 5. Soft menu Figure 4-5: The Color Mode screen Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 176: Color M-Mode Overview

Color M-Mode overview 1. Time motion cursors 2. Color bar 3. Focus marker 4. Flow sector marker 5. Time scale 6. Status window 7. Soft menu Figure 4-6: The Color M-Mode screen (top/bottom display) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 177: Color Mode Controls

Controls the amount of variance data added to a color display. Variance enables computer-aided detection of turbulent flow (e.g. jets or regurgitation). Variance is available in live and cine replay. Simultaneous Enables simultaneous display of 2D and Color mode, side-by-side. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 178
Smart Depth For best sensitivity in color-mode, the Color Frequency/Transmit Pattern used should be optimized as a function of the location of the color-ROI. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 179
ROI (Region Of Interest) size When the trackball command Size is selected (see also «Trackball operation» on page 108), the height and width of the color area (or ROI) is adjusted from the trackball. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 180: Using Color Mode

Use the trackball to adjust the dimension of the color area. To enlarge the color area, move the trackball up To narrow the color area, move the trackball down. Press when the desired size is obtained. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 181: Optimizing Color Mode

An increase of the lateral averaging will reduce noise, but this will also reduce the lateral resolution. Use all noise reduction controls with care. Excessive application may obscure low level diagnostic information. CAUTION Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 182: Pw And Cw Doppler

This is not an absolute value, but simply a reference number. Users performing studies using standardized protocols may find this sweep speed information useful for reading studies from other institutions. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 183: Pw And Cw Doppler Controls

Invert in PW is available inverted. in live and cine replay; invert in CW is available only in live mode. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 184
Compress is available in both Live and Freeze. Reject Enables undesirable background noise to be removed from the Doppler spectrum resulting in a darker background. Reject is available in both Live and Freeze. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 185: Using Pw/Cw Doppler Modes

To narrow the SV, press the Left arrow of the rocker. tings. Alternative 2 Press on the control panel. A cursor line is CURSOR displayed on the 2D image. With the trackball adjust the position of the cursor line. Press Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 186: Optimizing Pw/Cw Doppler Modes

When Zoom is ac- tive while in PW or blood flow to be measured (Not typically required during CW modes, use the cardiac studies). Depth rocker but- ton to adjust the zoom magnifica- tion factor Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 187: Tissue Velocity Imaging (Tvi)

Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI) calculates and color-codes the velocities in tissue. The tissue velocity information is acquired by sampling of tissue Doppler velocity values at discrete points. The information is stored in a combined format with greyscale Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 188
Turns TVI display on/off. When TVI display is turned off the TVI acquisition is still in turned on and raw-data is still acquired but remains hidden from the display. Cineloop (in Freeze only) Starts cineloop acquisition. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 189
Controls the level of greyscale intensity that is used as a threshold for color. Transparency Controls the degree of transparency of the TVI color. Frequency Enables the adjustment of the transmission frequency to control the sensitivity or the level of penetration. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 190
The use of preset gives optimum performance with minimum Refer to page 593 about creating pre- adjustment. If necessary, the following controls can be adjusted sets. to further optimize the TVI display: Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 191: Tissue Tracking

2. Tissue Tracking color bar 3. Status window 4. Soft menu 5. Track start and track end markers 6. Tracking start and end from R-peak Figure 4-9: The Tissue Tracking Mode screen Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 192
Invert is available in live and cine replay. Starts TSI mode (see page 188). Simultaneous Enables simultaneous display of 2D image and 2D image with Tissue Tracking color. Cineloop (in Freeze only) Starts cineloop acquisition. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 193
Smooths the image by averaging collected data along the so as not to obscure same horizontal line. An increase of the lateral averaging will significant diagnos- reduce noise, but this will also reduce the lateral resolution. tic information Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 194
The main use of Tissue Tracking is to map positive systolic displacements. This means that TRACKING START assignables should be adjusted to pick out TRACKING END the systolic phase of the cardiac cycle: Adjust Tracking Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 195
Tissue Tracking provides velocity information only in the beam direction. The apical view typically provides the best window since the beams are then approximately aligned to the longitudinal direction of the myocardium (except near the apex). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 196: Strain Rate

Figure 4-10: The Strain rate mode screen Strain rate calculates and color-codes the deformation per unit time i.e the speed at which the tissue deformation occurs. Strain rate is defined as the spatial gradient of velocity data. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 197: Strain Rate Controls

Starts cineloop acquisition. Alternative assignable controls Press to access to the following modes: • Curved Anatomical M-Mode (see page 155) • Tissue Synchronization Imaging (see page 188) • Tissue Tracking (see page 173) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 198
Smooths the image by averaging collected data along the so as not to obscure same radial line. An increase of the radial averaging will reduce significant diagnos- noise, but this will also reduce the radial resolution. tic information. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 199: Using Strain Rate

There is a trade-off between noise and spatial resolution controlled by the Strain length. To minimize noise the Strain length should be maximized. A value of 12mm is typical for adult cardiac patients. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 200
Strain rate. If set too high, the maximum Strain rate color is never reached. • Low strain rates may be masked out with a green color using the SRI Reject control. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 201: Strain

6. Strain start and end from R-peak and Strain sample size Figure 4-11: The Strain mode screen Strain calculates and color-codes the extent of tissue deformation (lengthening or shortening) relative to the original size over a given time interval, typically the systole. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 202: Strain Controls

Displays a menu of color map options. Use the trackball to point a color map and press to activate a desired color map. Q-analysis (in Freeze only) Starts the Quantitative analysis application (see Chapter 8, «Quantitative Analysis» on page 375). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 203
Controls the level of greyscale intensity that is used as threshold for color. Transparency Control the degree of transparency of the strain color. Frequency Enables the adjustment of the transmission frequency to control the sensitivity or the level of penetration. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 204: Using Strain

• The main use of Strain is to map negative systolic deformation. This means that STRAIN START STRAIN should be adjusted to pick out the systolic phase of the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 205
(except near the apex). • Low strain values may be masked out with a different color using the SI Reject control. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 206: Tissue Synchronization Imaging (Tsi)

5. Status window 6. Soft menu Figure 4-12: The TSI mode screen TSI calculates and color-codes the time from onset of QRS to a detected event, typically the time to peak systolic velocity. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 207: Tsi Controls

Enables simultaneous display of 2D image and 2D image with TSI color. Cineloop (in Freeze only) Starts cineloop acquisition. Color maps Displays a menu of color map options. Use the assignable rotary knob to select and activate a desired color map. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 208
Cine Compound (Freeze only) Calculates and displays cineloops generated from a temporal averaging of multiple consecutive heart cycles. The number of Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 209: Using Tsi

Aortic Valve Closure (AVC) or Mitral Valve Opening (MVO) event, providing that these events are measured. If not measured, the TSI end marker is adjusted relatively to the estimated End Systole. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 210: Optimizing Tsi

Default TSI start and end times are suggested • When analyzing TEE images where systolic velocities are negative, the detection mode may be changed to «Time to peak negative velocity» using the Invert control. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 211: Additional Scanning Features

• Do not make abrupt changes in speed of motion. If required, press again to restart the acquisition. 2D FREEZE To complete the scan, press FREEZE Adjust the assigned rotary LOGIQVIEW ROTATE to rotate the acquisition. Perform measurements. Press IMG STORE. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 212: Compound

Compound is available with linear and 4C-RS curved probes in 2D live mode, or in the 2D image while in Color mode. Compound is on by default. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 213: B-Flow

Doppler display/Doppler audio and the BFI color display. Using blood flow imaging While in Color flow, press the assigned key BFI. Adjust Flow speckle. Increased Flow speckle enhances hemodynamics. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 214: Virtual Convex

Color, Doppler or M-mode and virtual convex will remain active on the 2D image. Note: While Virtual Convex is turned on, the Zoom function will always activate in «Display-zoom» mode only. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 215: Stress Echo

• References …………….224 • Editing/creating a template …………225 • Entering the Template editor screen ……..225 • Template editor screen overview ……….226 • Editing/Creating a template …………229 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 216: Introduction

Stress Echo Introduction The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 ultrasound unit provides an integrated stress echo package option, with the ability to perform image acquisition, review, image optimization, and wall segment scoring and reporting for a complete, efficient stress echo examination. The stress package provides protocol templates for exercise, as well as, pharmacological stress examinations.
Page 217: Selection Of A Stress Test Protocol Template

Trackball to the desired template. Press Turn freeze off to initiate scanning using the new template. 1. Projection selection 2. Level 3. Current acquisition 4. Projection 5. Group of views Figure 5-1: The Protocol screen Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 218: Image Acquisition

1. Current view label 2. Template matrix 3. Current view (Green cell) 4. Timers Figure 5-2: The stress mode acquisition screen Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 219: Starting Acquisition

The wall segment scoring diagrams for each view is displayed in the Parameters window on the right side of the screen (see Figure 5-9, page 215). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 220
Selecting a view during acquisition A fixed protocol is provided for scanning, based on the selected template. The system automatically highlights the next view to be acquired in the template matrix, as images are stored. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 221
After storage the system automatically highlights the next available view to be acquired. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 222
Timers Two timers can be displayed in the Stress mode acquisition screen, beside the template matrix (see Figure 5-4). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 223: Continuous Capture Mode

To enable best possible use of the limited storage buffer capacity, a Pause/Capture mode is provided, as opposed to the normal Freeze/Scan mode. The Pause mode enables scanning Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 224
The percentage of the buffer that is filled • The buffer filling progression showed by a green filling gauge • The capturing sessions, reflected by the red lines along the Buffer bar Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 225
When 90% of the memory buffer is filled up, the text display in the buffer bar turns red. The unit enters Freeze mode automatically once the buffer is full and the captured loops are displayed in the Continuous capture selection screen (see below). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 226
Local- the capture again from the Protocol screen). Arch-IntHD and several minutes on Press Store all to keep the entire loop. LocalArch-MOD. 14. Perform Analysis and scoring (see page 213). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 227
Perform Analysis and scoring (see page 213). Postponed image assignment The assignment of the cineloops to the views can be done on a later stage on a stored Continuous capture acquisition. Perform Continuous capture as described in «Running Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 228
The recording in memory is deleted and the Continuous capture is started again. Resume Continuous capture • Press CONTINUE CAPTURE Resumes Continuous capture recording (only if the Continuous capture buffer is not full). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 229
Trackball to the desired loop in order to assign it to a particular view of the stress template. The frame of the loop is highlighted. Press A pop-up menu is displayed with the view names of the template (see Figure 5-7). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 230
1. Assigned loop 2. Highlighted loop 3. Views pop-up menu 4. Highlighted views 5. Already assigned view Figure 5-7: Loop assignment in Continuous capture Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 231: Analysis

Analyze screen (see page 216). Note: Pressing (while no images are selected in ANALYZE Protocol screen) automatically opens the first group of images in the analysis screen. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 232
A preview of the acquisitions is displayed. Trackball to the first image to select. Press The frame of the selected loop is highlighted. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select other images. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 233
This means that for instance when scoring a short axis projection and a long axis projection from the same stress level, then common segments with the same scoring value will be shown in the respective scoring diagrams. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 234
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to score relevant segments. (see Figure 5-9) Rotate the assignable to display next group CHANGE PAGE of images. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to score relevant segments on the new loops. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 235
Stress Echo 1. Selected segment 2. Selected score 1. Scored segment Figure 5-10: Segment scoring Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 236: Quantitative Tvi Stress Echo Analysis

Diagnosis must not be based on results achieved by QTVI Stress analysis only. WARNING The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 Ultrasound unit provides a Quantitative TVI (QTVI) Stress analysis package based on Tissue velocity information (TVI). The TVI data is stored in a combined format with grey scale imaging during stress examination.
Page 237: Accessing Qtvi Stress Analysis Tools

The three QTVI Stress analysis tools are entered by pressing a dedicated button on the scoring diagram (see Figure 5-11) of the selected view. Only views with TVI data acquired will display QTVI Stress tools buttons on the respective diagrams. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 238: Vpeak Measurement

When activating QTVI Stress, the measurement applies only to the currently highlighted segment for the current level and projection view. To display a Vpeak measurement Perform segment scoring as described on page 216. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 239
Select another scoring bullet in the diagram in one of the peak views. To turn off the Vpeak measurement tool Trackball to one of the V button in the peak view scoring diagrams. Press in the trackball area. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 240
(see «References» on page 224). The result is highlighted by a color-coding of the thresholds lines, the color-coding in the 2D image and the scoring bullet (see Figure 5-12). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 241: Tissue Tracking

Figure 5-13: Tissue Tracking display Quantitative analysis Quantitative analysis enables further analysis based on multiple tissue velocity traces. Quantitative analysis is performed using the Quantitative analysis package described in Chapter 8, «Quantitative Analysis» on page 375. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 242: References

Application of Tissue Doppler to Interpretation of Dubotamine Echocardiography and Comparison With Quantitative Coronary Angiography. Cain P, Baglin T, Case C, Spicer D, Short L. and Marwick T H. Am. J. Cardiol. 2001; 87: 525-531 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 243: Editing/Creating A Template

Press to enter the stress echo mode. PROTOCOL Press the assignable TEMPLATE The Template pop-up menu is displayed. Trackball to Template Editor. Press The Template editor screen is displayed (see Figure 5-14). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 244: Template Editor Screen Overview

Template editor screen overview Figure 5-14: The Template editor screen Template Parameter Description Template: • Select a pre-defined template from the pop-up menu. The Protocol template preview (see below) is updated accordingly. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 245
(see page 407 for further information). • Show reference: : displays a dual screen with the reference level (first or previous level) on the left and the live image on the right. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 246
(or foot pedal). Reference image: • When Show Reference is selected (see page 227), selects either corresponding baseline loop or corresponding loop from the previous level to be displayed as reference image during acquisition. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 247: Editing/Creating A Template

(see Figure 5-14). The new grid size is displayed in the Protocol template preview field. Press New Template to create a new template. Press Save Template to update the base template. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 248
Number of cycles to be stored in the cineloop: • Enter the desired number in the Cycles field. Up to four cycles/cineloop can be stored. Continuous capture • Check Continuous capture if continuous image acquisition throughout the level is desired. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 249
In the Pre-defined group field, select the group to delete. A selected group is highlighted by a Press Delete group. yellow frame. The group is removed from the list in the Pre-defined group field. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 250
Stress Echo Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 251: Contrast Imaging

• LV Contrast controls …………..236 • Using LV Contrast …………..238 • Optimizing LV Contrast …………239 • Vascular Contrast Imaging …………240 • Abdominal Contrast Imaging …………241 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 252: Introduction

Left Ventricular Contrast imaging. The LV Contrast (LVO) application is optimized for endocardial border detection and assessment of wall motion and wall thickening. This application requires the LVO Contrast option to be enabled. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 253: Non-Cardiac Imaging

Left ventricular opacification, optimal resolution of endocardial borders delineationand for optimal assessment of wall motion. The LV Contrast application may help to identify LV thrombus and evaluate wall motion. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 254: Lv Contrast Overview

By default the axis of the 2D image is vertical. Frequency Enables the adjustment of the probe’s operating frequency. A higher frequency gives better resolution. Frequency is also used to switch between Octave (single-pulse) and CPI (Coded Phase inversion — multi-pulse). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 255
LV Contrast Soft menu controls Power Controls the amount of acoustic power applied to the transmitted pulse. Compress Too high Power lev- el will destroy the Controls the degree of image contrast. contrast agent. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 256: Using Lv Contrast

The Application menu for the selected probe is listed. Trackball to LV Contrast application. Press to launch the application. Perform the acquisition. Always read and follow carefully the manufacturer instructions on the contrast agent label. WARNING Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 257: Optimizing Lv Contrast

If a swirling pattern is observed and persists after the LV cavity has been filled with contrast, the power should be reduced until homogenous opacification is obtained Too high Power setting will destroy the contrast agent in the LV cavity. CAUTION Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 258: Vascular Contrast Imaging

This application may not be available on your system. Contrast agent for this application are undergoing clinical trial and therefore, not yet available in the United States. CAUTION Note: the Vascular Contrast application requires the Vascular/Abdominal Contrast option enabled. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 259: Abdominal Contrast Imaging

This application may not be available on your system. Contrast agent for this application are undergoing clinical trial and therefore, not yet available in the United States. CAUTION Note: The Abdominal Contrast application requires the Vascular/Abdominal Contrast option enabled. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 260
Contrast Imaging Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 261
• Hip Dysplasia Calculation …………315 • Making Hip Dysplasia Measurement ……..315 • Performing an OB exam …………..317 • Patient entry …………….317 • Selecting probe and OB application ……… 321 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 262
• Fetal Growth Bar Graph …………365 • OB-Multigestational …………….. 366 • Multiple Fetus …………….366 • GYN Measurements …………….. 370 • Introduction …………….370 • To Start a Gynecology Exam ………… 370 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 263
• Ovary length, width, and height ……….372 • Follicle measurements length, width, and height ….. 373 • Endometrium thickness (Endo) ……….373 • M-Mode Measurements …………..374 • Doppler Mode Measurements …………374 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 264: Introduction

Measurement and Analysis Introduction The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 Ultrasound unit provides functionality for two measurement conventions: • Assign and Measure (Measure Protocols): the user A study is a set of related measure- selects a study consisting in a set of pre-labeled…
Page 265: About Measurement Results Display

Config -> Meas/Text -> Advanced, by setting the attribute Absolute Value to Off. • Calculated parameters For calculated parameters the system uses signed values in calculation formulas, and displays the absolute value of the result. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 266: The Assign And Measure Modality

The trackball cursor is in the parameter window, ready for measurement selection. 1. Active application 2. Study 3. Selected study 4. Opened study 5. Measurements related to the area study for the cardiac application Figure 7-1: Example of a measurement study Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 267: Entering A Study And Performing Measurements

When the measurement operation is completed the next measurement on the list is automatically selected. To skip a measurement in a study Trackball to the desired measurement Press to activate the measurement tool. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 268
Measurement and Analysis 1. Performed measurement 2. Next measurement is automatically selected Figure 7-2: Display of a performed measurement (example) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 269: Measure And Assign Modality

The cursor is moved back to the scanning window, ready for measurement. Measurement tools Figure 7-3: The 2D Mode Measurement tools (Cardiac application) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 270: Post-Measurement Assignment Labels

Worksheet (see page 353). Up to five assigned measurements with the same label can be stored in the patient archive. Only assigned measurements will be saved. Measurements without assignment will be lost when scanning is resumed. CAUTION Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 271
Measurement and Analysis 1. Parameter Label menu 2. Selected label Assignment 3. Assigned measurement Figure 7-4: Measurement assignment Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 272
The Enter new parameter window is displayed. Figure 7-5: The Enter new parameter window Type a name for the parameter label. Press OK. The user defined parameter label is assigned to the selected measurement. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 273: Cardiac Measurements

Perform two length measurements as described in steps 5 through 8 in the above section. The measurement results including the ratio (%) of the two measured lengths are displayed in the Measurement result table. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 274
8 in the above section. The measurement results including the ratio (%) of the two See the Status bar to get the next step measured areas are displayed in the Measurement result to perform. table. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 275
(see Figure 7-1) and are instantaneously updated when the measurement. moving the cursor. 10. Press to complete the measurement. The measurement results including Vmod (Simpson) are displayed in the Measurement result table (see Figure 7-1). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 276
Press to anchor the point. The measurements displayed on the 2D The depth value (cm) is displayed in the Measurement image and the cor- result table. responding results are numbered. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 277: M-Mode Measurements

M-Mode image and measurement to modify. the corresponding results are num- Press twice (double-click). bered. The selected marker turns green and is unanchored. With the Trackball, reposition the marker to a new position. Press Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 278
EDV (End diastole volume) • ESV (End systole volume) • SV (Stroke volume) • EF (Ejection Fraction) • FS (Fractional Shortening) To perform LV study Generate the M-Mode image. Press to stop the cineloop. FREEZE Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 279
RVIDd. signable. Press . The starting point for the measurement is anchored. Trackball to the end point of the measurement. The current value is updated while mov- ing the cursor. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 280: Doppler Measurements

Select Caliper in the Measurement Menu. trol panel and press Trackball the cursor to the start point of the measurement. assign- CALIPER able. Press to anchor the start point of the measurement. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 281
Trackball the cursor to the start point of the next heart beat. 10. Press the to anchor the next heart beat starting point. The heart rate (BPM) is displayed in the Measurement result table. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 282
Trackball the cursor to the peak of A wave. 10. Press to anchor the point. the velocity at peak for E and A waves and the calculated E/A ratio are displayed in the Measurement result table. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 283
Analysis window and Anatomical M-Mode window in Q Analysis. Generate the spectrum to be measured. Press to stop the cineloop. FREEZE Press on the Control Panel. MEASURE Select Event Timing in the Measurement menu. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 284: Tsi Measurements

Generic Time to peak measurement Acquire a TSI apical loop. Press MEASURE In the Measurement menu, select Generic and Time to peak (see Figure 7-6). The TSI loop freezes at the TSI end frame. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 285
Place a point in the middle of the corresponding segment in the TSI image. The Time to peak and the Peak velocity for the segment are displayed in the Measurement result window. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 286
The TSI indexes indicate degrees of asynchrony in time to peak velocity Select TSI Bull’s eye report in the Measurement menu. The measurements are displayed in a color coded bull’s eye diagram together with a list of the calculated TSI indexes. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 287
The ROI and the corresponding TSI curve are displayed (see Figure 7-8). Press to anchor the ROI and trace. If required, select a new peak location in the trace. Click in the acquisition window to exit the TSI trace. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 288
Note: if Time is not available in the Generic folder press on the Control panel. ACTIVE MODE In the Analysis window, measure the time from the yellow QRS marker to the peak velocity of the velocity trace. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 289
Q Analysis and compare the result with a manual Time to peak measurement. To access to the corresponding measurement tool in Q Analysis you may have to press to display the relevant Measurement ACTIVE MODE menu. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 290
Segment Time to peak measurements may return the time to a different peak than what a manual method would do. Typically in these situations, the TSI image will show a wide range of colors over a small spatial region. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 291: Automated Function Imaging

All values are stored to the worksheet. In addition, Global Strain for each view, Average Global Strain for the whole LV, and the Aortic Valve Closure time used in the analysis are stored to the worksheet. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 292
Measurement and Analysis APLAX 4-Ch 2-Ch Step Acquired views Defining a ROI Tracking validation AVC timing adjustment Parametric image result Review screen Trace and Bulls-Eye result Figure 7-10: AFI workflow Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 293
A depth range that includes the entire left ventricle should be used. Starting AFI Open an APLAX view and press MEASURE In the Measurement menu, select AFI. The View selection menu is displayed (Figure 7-11). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 294
Should you wish to turn it off use the YOYO soft button. Note: In case the Yo-yo function is not running place the trackball pointer in the vicinity of the contour trace to activate it. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 295
The system has an adaptive ROI function: using the endocardial three points as a guide, the system will analyze the image and automatically adapt the ROI to an optimal position. Figure 7-13: ROI Generation Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 296
If the ROI needs to be adjusted make sure to make the changes immediately after the ROI is displayed. CAUTION Note: The auto processing function is configurable (from Config/Meas-Text/Advanced/AFI/AutoEF auto processing). Figure 7-15: AFI auto processing configuration Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 297
Tip window. Make sure to follow the recommendations when placing the three points (see below). Base Correct Wrong Correct position of the base points. The ROI extends into the aortic tract. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 298
The ROI is extending beyond the epicardium. Apex Correct Wrong Correct position of the Apex point. The upper right border of the ROI is way too much into the chamber cavity. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 299
End systole frame: the entire left ventricle is displayed. End diastole frame: the annulus is not displayed. Processing After the processing has been completed, the following screen appears. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 300
Recalc — Allows to go back to previous screen in order to manually correct the ROI. Approve — Press Approve once the tracking quality has been validated. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 301
Scoring table. Once the tracking quality has been validated for all segments, press Approve in the Scoring table, or Approve Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 302
This option is only available from the APLAX view. AVC Timing Adjustment Note: This procedure is available in the APLAX view only. After validation of the tracking quality, the frame for the current AVC setting (automatic or event timing Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 303
Figure 7-17: Parametric systolic strain APLAX view Note: The image will not be saved unless Store is pressed. Press Quad softkey to display a quad screen (Figure 7-18) showing: • 2D image with the ROI Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 304
Define a ROI («Defining a ROI» on page 276). • Tracking Validation («Tracking Validation» on page 283). Note: the AVC timing setting defined in the APLAX view is used by the system when running AFI on the other apical views. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 305
4 Chamber views are therefore preliminary values. Only final strain values should be reported. If you enter Quad screen again after all three loops have been processed, the strain values will be correct. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 306
17 segments (from Config/Meas-Text/Advanced/ AFI Segment model)(Figure 7-15). Note: The system can be configured so that the user can also choose to display Post systolic index (PSI) color coding and segmental PSI values in the Bulls-Eye (from Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 307
When approving the tracking in the Apical 2-chamber the Review screen with three Apical views and Bulls-Eye is displayed (Figure 7-20). Select Bulls-Eye only to display the Single Bulls-Eye screen (Figure 7-22). Figure 7-20: Review Screen Figure 7-21: BE+Traces Screen Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 308
If the tracking quality of a segment was scored as Not acceptable ( ), the colorimetric display on the Bulls-Eye is greyed (Figure 7-23). 1. Segment with tracking quality scored as Not acceptable ( Figure 7-23: Colorimetric display Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 309
Not acceptable ( • If the tracking quality was scored as Not acceptable ) in more than one segment, the Global peak strain value is not calculated. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 310: Autoef Measurements

The AutoEF tool is derived from 2D speckle tracking algorithm, which tracks and calculates the myocardial tissue deformation based on feature tracking on 2D grey scale loops. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 311
• A depth range that includes the entire left ventricle should be used. Starting AutoEF Open any one of the stored views and press MEASURE In the Measurement menu, select AutoEF. The View selection menu is displayed (Figure 7-25). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 312
Note: the Yo-yo function is turned on to help finding correct location for the points. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 313
(Figure 7-27). The shape of the border trace will update accordingly. In case you wish to start over, press Redraw and re-position the 3 points defining the basal and apex points. Figure 7-26: Defining a ROI Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 314
Note: Data processing is configured by default to start automatically if the cursor is not moved for a few seconds. If the trace needs to be adjusted make sure to make the changes immediately after the ROI is displayed. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 315
The system will automatically pick the frames with the maximal back speed exit au- area (ED) and minimal area (ES) and place them on the right toEF. area of the display. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 316
Figure 7-30: Border Trace Edit • In case these results are incorrect you may go back to the previous step by pressing the Recalc soft-button and editing the endocardial border («Tracing the endocardial Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 317
For each of the views, a results screen containing the EF calculation, appears (Figure 7-28) with a small mini-report appearing in the results window on the right side (Figure 7-31). Figure 7-31: Mini Report Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 318
Click Yes to store the loop or No to discard it. Note: Do not disable any sub-measurement of AutoEF using Config. tab, as this will disable the whole set of AutoEF measurements. Figure 7-32: Results in worksheet Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 319
Measurement and Analysis Figure 7-33: Results in the Report template Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 320: Vascular Measurements

MEASURE Generic. Select Volume in the Measurement menu. When doing volume calculation from three distance measurements (i.e. biplane volume), the measurements should be done in dual mode displaying a sagittal and an Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 321: Intima-Media Thickness

IMT measurement is generally more accurate than the anterior IMT measurement. The following parameters are calculated: • Average IMT • Maximum IMT • Minimum IMT • Standard deviation of IMT measurements • Number of successful IMT measurements Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 322
At any time, the users may select if they wish to measure IMT by the protocol or by the arbitrary method. IMT Measurement procedure The following procedure describes the posterior IMT measurement. Acquire a longitudinal scan of the carotid artery and optimize the image. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 323
In case Protocol is set to ON place the vertical cursor on some anatomical reference point on the bifurcation. 10. Press . This will anchor a vertical cursor on the anatomical reference point, and an ROI box will appear on Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 324
IMT Measurement Protocol setting When the IMT Protocol soft-button is turned ON two special controls will appear: «Offset» and «Length», controlling the IMT ROI with predefined length and predefined distance (offset) from the vertical marker. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 325
Measurements that are not approved will not be saved. CAUTION Any image adjustments (e.g. Gain or zoom) on approved (transferred) measurements will unassign the measurements. Press Transfer to approve the measurements again. CAUTION Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 326: M-Mode Measurements

Open A/B Ratio in the Measurement menu. Select between: • Ratio (Diam • Ratio (Time) • Ratio (Velocity) Make the corresponding two measurements. The measurements and the corresponding A/B Ratio are displayed in the Measurement result table. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 327: Doppler Measurements

• Max and/or Mean to display max and/or mean velocities. In the Modify Calcs menu, select the measurements and calculations to be displayed in the Measurement result table. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 328
Figure 7-37: Vascular measurement menu (example) Using Auto vascular calculation Perform the scan and press FREEZE The system performs the calculation automatically and the pre-defined measurements and calculation are displayed in the Measurement result table. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 329
Measurement menu or from the Show All menu for additional measurements. Perform the measurement as described below. Acceleration, Acceleration time (AT) Select Accel or AT. Position the caliper at the start point and press anchor the caliper. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 330
Using the trackball, draw the trace to the end diastole and press The trace is displayed and PS, ED, MD, TAMAX, PI and RI are displayed in the Measurement result table. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 331
Position the caliper at the start point and press anchor the caliper. Using the trackball, draw the trace to the end point and press The trace is displayed and the corresponding measurements are displayed in the Measurement result table. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 332: Pediatric Calculations

Figure 7-38: Pediatrics B-Mode Measurement Top/Sub Menu The following generic measurements are common to other exam applications: • %Stenosis • Volume • Angle • A/B Ratio See «2D Measurements» on page 255 for more information. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 333: Hip Dysplasia Calculation

Trackball. To rotate or change inclination, adjust the Ellipse control or Hip Rotate. To fix the second measurement line, press . The system displays a third dotted line at an angle. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 334
(orientation) and then select d:D Ratio. A horizontal dotted line displays. Use the Trackball to place the baseline along the ilium. Position the crosshairs edge at the osseous convexity of the ilium. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 335: Performing An Ob Exam

Figure 7-39). Use the fields in this screen to enter various data (see Table 7-1) After entering data click the Begin Exam softkey to continue with the exam and get a scanning screen. Alternatively, click 2D Mode to continue scanning. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 336
If you click on the GA by LMP button it will change into GA. When you fill in the GA (Gestational Age) the system calculates and fills in the LMP and the EDD by GA field. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 337
LMP and the GA by EDD values Note 3: If you prefer to enter the estimated GA instead of LMP, click on the GA button just to the left of the GA field, and type in Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 338
Select CONFIG > Imaging > Global. Select Title Bar Line 1 or Line 2 to select the relevant information to appear on the screen. Figure 7-40: Setting patient information on the image title bar Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 339: Selecting Probe And Ob Application

The measurements available by default for OB1 are: GS (Hellman) CRL (Hadlock) BPD (Hadlock) FL (Hadlock) OB2/3 application The measurements available by default for OB2/3 are: AC (Hadlock) HC (Hadlock) BPD (Hadlock) FL (Hadlock) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 340: Ob Measurements And Calculations

The accuracy of measurements is not only determined by the system accuracy, but also by use of proper medical protocols by the user. When appropriate, be sure to note any protocols Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 341: B-Mode Measurements

Note: Calculation formulas are listed in the Reference Manual. B-Mode measurements This section describes all B-Mode measurements that you typically find in OB studies. Additional OB measurements follow the typical ones. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 342
The system displays the selected Parameter diameter in the Results Window. Editing 2D Length measurements While the measurement is on the screen, trackball the cursor to one of the anchor points of the measurement to modify. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 343
Table 7-4: Circumference parameters Parameter Full name Abdominal Circumference Head Circumference When selecting one of the Circumference parameters shown in Table 7-4 above, the system will automatically provide an Ellipse tool to perform the measurement. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 344
The selected marker is unanchored and can be moved. With the Trackball, reposition the caliper. The ellipse will rotate or stretch along with the motion of the caliper Press to anchor. Figure 7-42: Editing ellipse measurements Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 345
Results Window. It displays the three diameters d1, d2 and d3. In addition, it shows the average diameter GS and the corresponding estimated age. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 346
Select OB-2/3, then AFI(Moore) located just under it. The first distance measurement, AFI-Q1, is already selected. Make a standard distance measurement for the first quadrant: • To position the active caliper at the start point, move the Trackball. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 347
AFI total and displays it in the Results Window. Note: If the fluid in a pocket is zero, set the second caliper on top of the first one to give it a zero value. Figure 7-44: Amniotic Fluid Index Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 348: M-Mode Measurements

• Umbilical • Uterine (right and left) For each of these studies, you can make any of the following measurements: • Peak Systole (PS) • End Diastole (ED) • Minimum Diastole (MD) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 349
To select OB/GYN vessel measurements OB/GYN Vessel measurements use the auto sequence feature. With this feature, when you select a folder for the vessel you want to measure, the system automatically starts Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 350
Doppler M&A section of the Vascular package (page 309). The following pages describe the steps to make each specific measurement in the OB/GYN Vessel study. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 351: Ob Parameter Configuration

Set the M&A category to Obstetrics. Locate the parameter OB Type in the upper pane and click on the region. A menu opens listing the region names. Figure 7-46: Region name menu OB-1 Folder contents Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 352
Measurement and Analysis OB-2/3 Folder contents OB-General Folder contents Europe OB-1 Folder contents Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 353
Measurement and Analysis OB-2/3 Folder contents Osaka Osaka Folder contents Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 354
Measurement and Analysis Tokyo/Shinozuka Folder contents JSUM Folder contents EFW (Osaka) Folder contents EFW (Tokyo) Folder contents EFW1 (S) Folder contents Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 355
Measurement and Analysis EFW2 (S) Folder contents EFW3 (S) Folder contents EFW (JSUM) Folder contents ASUM ASUM 2001 Folder contents ASUM Folder contents Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 356: Measurement Package Configuration

The Measurement menu sheet is displayed (see Figure 7-47). AV Diam is a 2D measurement, make sure that 2D is checked in the Measurement sheet. Select folder Dimension in the Measurement menu. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 357
1. Select the scanning mode for the measurement to add to the Measurement menu. 2. Select the folder for the measurement to add. 3. Select the measurement to add. Figure 7-47: Configuration of the Measurement menu Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 358
Normal values can be defined by the user for all parameters. A Normal value can be either a range or a threshold. Normal values entered are grouped by measurement category (e.g. Cardiac, Pediatry etc.) Normal values are displayed in the report. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 359
Measurement menu sheet. Note: to change Measurement category, press the Heading in the Measurement menu and select another Measurement category. Select in the Normal value column. The Normal value window is displayed. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 360
To display Normal values and references in the Report, the Report template must be configured to show Normal values (see page 340). Measurements outside the Normal value are highlighted in the Report. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 361: User-Defined Formulas

User-defined formulas can be created using existing measurements or by defining new measurements. The following example describes the creation of a formula based on existing measurements. GE Medical Systems does not take any responsibility for the correctness of the user-defined functions. CAUTION User-defined formula — example The workflow for user-defined formula is: •…
Page 362
Give the folder a name (e.g. “My Folder”). Adding measurements 1. Select the user-defined folder. 2. Press Add measurement. Figure 7-51: The Measurement menu sheet Select the user-defined folder (e.g. “My Folder”) in the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 363
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to add the AVET measurement. Creation of the formula 1. Select the last measurement. 2. Double click and enter the formula name. 3. Select “=” to create the formula. Figure 7-53: The Measurement menu sheet Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 364
The Formula line should display: ({MCO}-{AVET})/{AVET}. No units are necessary since the formula is a ratio (see also «About units» on page 349). 12. Press Check to make sure that the syntax for the formula is correct. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 365
(e.g. 2D). Select the appropriate folder in the Measurement menu (e.g. Dimension). Press Add Measurement in the Measurement menu sheet. The Add measure window is displayed. Figure 7-56: The Add measure window Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 366
Distance) and enter a name for the parameter (e.g. My Length). If desired change the unit and the number of decimals for the measurement by double clicking the values under Unit and Precision (see also «About units» on page 349). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 367: About Units

If the selected display unit was set to mm the formula would give the exact same output, 0.046 m, but the automatic unit conversion would now instead give a displayed value of 46 mm. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 368
Mass Other * The correct SI unit for pressure is Pa, but here mm Hg was used as base unit as it is a standard pressure unit to use in medicine. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 369: Measurement Result Table

Trackball the Measurement result table to a new position. ment result table Press to anchor the table. from corner to cor- ner on the Acquisi- tion window. 1. Minimize/maximize table 2. Move table Figure 7-58: Measurement result table display tools Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 370: Deleting Measurements

Measurement and Analysis Deleting measurements Trackball to the measurement to delete in the Measurement result table and press A menu is displayed. Select Delete Measurement. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 371: Worksheet

Overview 1. Measurement type 4. Measured / calculated values 2. Measurement parameter 5. Value type 3. Value: Averaging, Max, Min or Last 6. Measurement type selection Figure 7-59: The Worksheet screen (Cardiac) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 372: Using Worksheet

To exclude a measurement Trackball to the measurement value to exclude. Press UPDATE MENU The Worksheet menu is displayed. Trackball to Exclude Value. When excluded the measurement dis- Press play turns grey. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 373
Press The value is re-calculated according the method selected. Deleting measurement parameter Trackball to the measurement parameter to delete. Press UPDATE MENU The Worksheet menu is displayed. Trackball to Delete Value. Press Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 374: Ob Worksheet

The OB Worksheet lists patient information, and all measurement and calculation data. • To view the OB Worksheet press Worksheet. 1. Patient data 2. Measurement information 3. Calculation information Figure 7-61: The OB worksheet Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 375: Patient Data

Value column. Choices are average, maximum, minimum, or last. To change the method: • Move the Trackball to the Method field. • Press • Move the Trackball to select from the list. • Press Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 376: Calculation Information

For more information about how to use the worksheet, see «Worksheet» on page 353. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 377: Ob Graphs

For multi-gestational patients you can plot all fetuses and compare the growth on the graphs. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 provides the following two basic types of graphs: •…
Page 378: Fetal Growth Curve Graph

Fetus position and Placenta fields. The legend at the bottom of the graph shows the symbols and colors that indicate data for fetal trending (Past and Present) and multiple gestation (Fetus). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 379
(GA) from the LMP, or to use the composite ultrasound age (CUA). To select, adjust the Select GA control. The information in the left column changes between CUA and GA (EDD), and the data may change. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 380
To select each view, press Single or Quad on softkey button. Figure 7-64: Fetal Growth Curve Graph: Quad View The measurement values are displayed at the bottom of the graph. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 381
• Move the Trackball to the field, which is left of the graph. To select the field press The system displays a window with the GA weeks and days. • To select each field, move the Trackball to the field and press Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 382: Fetal Trending

Press Graphs and select the desired measurement to display. Press More and then Plot Both. The system automatically finds the data from previous ultrasound exams, and displays it on the graph with the present data. Figure 7-66: Fetal Trending Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 383: Fetal Growth Bar Graph

You cannot do fetal trending or view multiple gestation data on the bar graph. Note: To return to the graphs, press the Worksheet and the Graph soft-key; or press the «More» and the Graph soft-key. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 384: Ob-Multigestational

Measurement and Analysis OB-Multigestational Multiple Fetus Vivid S5/Vivid S6 allows you to measure and report multiple fetus development. The system can report a maximum of four fetuses. To define the number of fetuses If more than one fetus is imaged during the exam, enter the number of fetuses in the Patient Information Entry page.
Page 385
With multiple fetuses, you can list and compare measurements of the fetuses on the worksheet. • Select Worksheet Display. • Select Fetus Compare. The system lists the measurement results for each fetus on the Worksheet. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 386
FetusNo field. Then, in the list of fetuses, move the Trackball to select the fetus you want, and press • To display data for multiple fetuses on the same graph, select Fetus Compare. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 387
Measurement and Analysis Figure 7-71: Fetal Growth Curve Graph: Fetus Compare The legend at the bottom of the graph shows the symbols and colors that represent each fetus. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 388: Gyn Measurements

FREEZE • On the Control Panel, press the key. B-MODE The system displays the Scan screen. On the Control Panel, press MEASURE The default Gynecology study is displayed on the Top/Sub Menu. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 389: B-Mode Measurements

To make the second and third distance measurement, repeat steps 2-3 above. After you complete the third distance measurement, the system displays the Ut-Vol (uterine volume) in the Results Window, together with the three dimensions: Ut-L, Ut-H, Ut-W. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 390: Ovary Length, Width, And Height

Results window. The results are: • Right side: Rt Ov-L, Rt Ov-H, Rt Ov-W, Rt Ov Vol • Left side: Lt Ov-L, Lt Ov-H, Lt Ov-W, Lt Ov Vol Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 391: Follicle Measurements Length, Width, And Height

To measure the endometrium thickness, make one distance measurement. Select Endo. An active caliper displays. To position the active caliper at the start point, move the Trackball. To fix the start point, press Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 392: M-Mode Measurements

TAMAX, pulsatility index, resistive index, acceleration, PS/ED, ED/PS, and acceleration time. For details regarding these measurements, see «Doppler measurements» on page 309. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 393
• Optimizing the Y-axis …………… 394 • Trace smoothing …………..395 • Switching modes or traces …………397 • To switch mode ……………. 397 • To switch trace …………….. 397 • Cine compound …………….398 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 394
Quantitative Analysis • Anatomical M-Mode …………….. 399 • Introduction …………….399 • Using Anatomical M-Mode …………399 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 395: Introduction

Multiple Strain (extend of tissue deformation (%)) trace display from selected segments in the myocardium. • Arbitrary Curved anatomical M-Mode Note: Strain and Strain Rate modes are options available on Vivid S6 only. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 396: Accessing The Quantitative Analysis Package

Figure 8-1). In live Press FREEZE Note: if in 2D mode outside a contrast application, press assignable. MORE Press the assignable Q ANALYSIS The Quantitative Analysis screen is displayed (see Figure 8-1). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 397: Quantitative Analysis Window

5. Time at cursor position and velocity at cursor position 2. Tissue cineloop window 6. Trackball Assignments 3. Analysis window 7. Sample area tools 4. Sample Area Figure 8-1: The Quantitative analysis window (here with TVI data) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 398
: removes selected sample area from the Cineloop window and belonging trace in the Analysis window. The trackball marker must be pointed at an anchored sample area. • Cancel: exits the System menu. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 399
Sample area tools: • : creates a sample area based on freehand drawing. • : creates a sample area with a pre-defined circular/elliptic shape (configurable, see page 392) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 400
(color coded) Strain rate: Displays Strain rate trace (rate of deformation Y axis: s X axis: time (s) Time at cursor position Strain rate at cursor position Strain rate at frame marker position Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 401
Y axis: percent displacement X axis: time (s) ECG with Strain start and Strain end markers Time at cursor position % deformation at cursor position % deformation at frame marker position (color coded) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 402
If present, trace data for physiological traces are also exported. • Unzoom : restores full analysis window display when in zoom mode. • Cancel: exits the System menu. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 403
The Trackball assignments Pointing tool in Quantitative analysis mode. Scroll/Speed: • When the cineloop is stopped, enables scrolling through the cineloop. • When the cineloop is running, enables control of the cine replay speed. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 404: Generation Of A Trace

The Strain cursor In Strain and Strain rate modes, the sample area displays a Strain cursor showing the segment along the beam direction that is used for Strain and Strain rate calculations. Make sure Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 405: Manual Tracking Of The Sample Area (Dynamic Anchored Sample Area)

Using the Trackball, scroll through the cineloop and control that the sample area follows the moving anatomical structure. Add anchored sample areas in several frames to obtain a more accurate displacement of the sample area. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 406: Zooming In The Analysis Window

The selected area is displayed in the Analysis window. To unzoom Press in the trackball area on the control UPDATE MENU panel. The System menu is displayed. Trackball to Unzoom. Press Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 407: Deletion Of A Trace

Saving/retrieving Quantitative analysis Press to save the quantitative analysis IMAGE STORE session. To recall the Quantitative analysis session, select the icon on the clipboard, and press the assigned key Q ANALYSIS Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 408: Frame Disabling

Re-enabling all frames Trackball the cursor to the Frame marker axis. Press in the trackball area on the control UPDATE MENU panel. The System menu is displayed. Trackball to Enable all frames. Press Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 409
All previously disabled frames are re-enabled. 1. Analysis window 2. Frame marker axis 3. Enabled frame (green marker) 4. Disabled frame (red marker) 5. ECG 6. Current frame Figure 8-2: Frame disabling Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 410: Optimizing Sample Area

Press OK to return to the Quantitative analysis window and use the settings for the current analysis only. Press Set as default to return to the Quantitative analysis screen and keep the settings as default. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 411: Labelling A Sample Area

A Dialogue window with a free text field is displayed (see Figure 8-4). Type a name for the sample area. Press OK to return to the Quantitative analysis screen. 1. Free text Figure 8-4: The sample area labelling window Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 412: Optimizing The Trace Display

Figure 8-5: The Vertical Auto-scaling menu Trackball to the desired option: • Delayed: autoscaling takes place after anchoring the sample area. • On: autoscaling while moving the sample area. • Off: displays full scale. Press Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 413: Trace Smoothing

If necessary, press until the QA trackball TRACKBALL assignment is selected. Trackball to the Analysis window. Press in the trackball area on the control UPDATE MENU panel. The System menu is displayed. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 414
Quantitative Analysis Select Smoothing. The Smoothing menu is displayed. Select a smoothing filter. The trace display is updated. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 415: Switching Modes Or Traces

Trackball to Analysis signal. Press The Analysis signal menu is displayed. Figure 8-7: The Analysis signal menu Trackball to the desired trace. Press The Analysis window is updated with the selected trace. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 416: Cine Compound

The traces are updated showing averaged data. The number of heart cycles averaged is displayed on the top left corner. Press the assigned key CC Zoom to display the last recorded heart cycle. Press CC Zoom again to unzoom. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 417: Anatomical M-Mode

The color-coded display of the corresponding data Rotate HORIZ. and scroll calculated along the path is shown in the Analysis window SWEEP through the (see Figure 8-8). cineloop to optimize the display to the portion of interest. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 418
Quantitative Analysis 1. Cineloop window 3. Path anchor point 2. Analysis window 4. Time scale Figure 8-8: The anatomical M-Mode display (here TVI data) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 419: Optimizing Anatomical M-Mode

To move an anchor point Trackball to anchor point to move. Press Trackball the anchor point to a new position. Press to anchor the point to its new location. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 420
Quantitative Analysis Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 421
• A scanner and EchoPAC PC in a network environment ..441 • A scanner and a DICOM server in a network ……443 • Export/Import patient records/examinations ……. 452 • Exporting patient records/examinations ……..452 • Importing patient records/examinations ……..460 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 422
• Database import from Vivid 3 or Vivid 4 ……..482 • Transfer Procedure …………..482 • Installing the Vivid 3/4 Data Viewer ………. 485 • Using the Vivid 3/4 Data Viewer ……….488 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 423: Introduction

Do not use the internal hard drive for long-term image storage. CAUTION The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 ultrasound unit enables also storing of data and images to external databases (Image Vault, Magneto Optical (MO) disk, CD-R or DVD-R). The patient and image archives are set by the selected dataflow (see page 616 about available dataflows and default dataflow selection).
Page 424: Storing Images And Cineloops

JPEG, AVI (cineloop), MPEG and DICOM (see page 408). 1. Single image stored 2. Cineloop stored Scrolling tool 3. Scrolling tool 4. Serial number of image Figure 9-1: The Clipboard on the scanning screen Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 425: Storing An Image

R-wave (see «The Global setup sheet» on page 590). Direct storage of a cineloop Depending on whether the system has been configured to enable or disable the Preview Loop before store function Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 426: Saving Images And Cineloops To A Standard Format

Export function as described on page 410. Procedure: In live: press FREEZE In replay: select an image thumbnail on the clipboard. Press on the control panel. UPDATE/MENU The System menu is displayed. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 427
DICOM standard. Select between: • Store image only: saves the image or cineloop only. • Store secondary capture: creates a still image of the image area and the Title bar. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 428: Mpegvue/Evue

A high quality setting will give a lower compression. 10. In the Save as type field select one of the following formats: • RawDICOM: saves the still image or cineloop in both GE raw format and DICOM format. • DICOM: saves the still image or cineloop in pure DICOM format.
Page 429
Select the Connectivity category and Dataflow subgroup. The Dataflow sheet is displayed. Select the dataflow Local Archive — Int. HD/eVue in the Name pull-down menu. Make sure that the option Hidden is unchecked. Figure 9-4: The Dataflow Sheet Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 430
A MPEG exam can be read from any computer with Windows 98/2000/XP, provided that DirectX 8.1 or later and Windows Media Player 7.1 or later are installed. Refer to the MPEGvue User Manual for details on reading MPEG exams on a computer. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 431: Retrieving And Editing Archived Information

The Search/Create patient window is displayed (Figure 9-8). Type the patient Last Name, and/or ID. Note: Use «Other ID» if relevant — For further information see «Using other ID» on page 99. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 432
The patient record is highlighted. Press SELECT PATIENT Press [+] in front of the actual patient record and select the desired examination. The Examination List window for the actual patient is displayed (refer to Figure 9-10). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 433
2. Select new archive and other pre-defined 5. Expended Patient record displaying belonging services examinations 3. Extended menu The Search/Create patient window may be slightly different depending on the Dataflow selected Figure 9-8: The Search/Create Patient window Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 434
Note: Use «Other ID» if relevant — For further information see «Using other ID» on page 99. Sorting data The search result can be sorted according to the fields displayed in the patient list, in ascending or descending order. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 435
3. The system can be configured to display the Advanced search tool as default (see page 626) The Search/Create patient window may be slightly different depending on the Dataflow selected. Figure 9-9: The extended Search/Create Patient window Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 436: Selecting A Patient Record And Editing Data In The Archive

3. Select the column heading border and drag to configurable (see page 626). adjust column width 2. Insert pre-defined text in the Comment field 4. Enter the diagnostic code Figure 9-10: The Examination list window Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 437
If an entry in the third column is inserted, the selected text in the second column is also inserted. Press More>> to display the full text for the selected entry. Figure 9-11: The Insert text window Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 438
In the Entered Code window, select the code to delete and press Delete. Creating a Diagnosis code In the Examination list window, select Code (see Figure 9-10) The Entered Code window is displayed. Select Add. The Code List window is displayed. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 439
CAUTION Press the assignable to go back to the Alternative: Press EXAM LIST any active scanning Examination list window. OR mode key. Press on the control panel to quit the archive. PATIENT Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 440: Deleting Archived Information

Trackball to the actual patient record and double-click the Trackball key (or press once and SELECT PATIENT to select the patient. The Examination list window is displayed. Trackball to the examination to delete. Press the trackball key. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 441
11. Press Delete. A pop-up dialog box is displayed asking for confirmation of the deletion. 12. Trackball to OK and press on the control panel. The image is deleted. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 442: Moving Examinations

Select the examination to move. Press the More soft button in the lower, right-hand corner of the Search/Create Patient window. Press the Move Exam soft button. The Move exam window is displayed. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 443
(see Figure 9-16). Make sure that the patient record selected is correct. CAUTION Figure 9-16: Moving examination prompt Trackball to OK and press An information window is displayed to confirm the operation. Press OK. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 444: Review Images In Archive

REVIEW The stored images for the selected examination are displayed in the Review screen (see Figure 9-17). To analyze images: Press on the images to analyze. Press ANALYZE Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 445: Select Images From The Image List Screen

In the Examination list window (see Figure 9-10, page 418), press Image list. The Image list screen is displayed (see Figure 9-20) showing thumbnails of stored images for the actual patient sorted by examination. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 446
• Restore current patient: restores all images in all examinations. Press OK. The Insert media window is displayed. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 447
• Cancel: no images are restored. The selected images are displayed for review. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 448
Archiving 1. Examination 2. Examination date and archive location 3. Selected image 4. Preview of selected image 5. Defined groups Figure 9-20: The Image list screen Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 449: Connectivity

A Vivid S5/Vivid S6 and one or several EchoPAC PC workstations in a sneaker net environment (page 435). • A Vivid S5/Vivid S6 and an EchoPAC PC workstations in a direct connect environment (page 437). • A Vivid S5/Vivid S6 and a DICOM server in a network (page 443).
Page 450
Search in the DICOM Modality Worklist, the patient found is copied into the local database. Images are stored to a DICOM server and to the internal hard drive. Figure 9-22: Scanner in a network dataflows (example) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 451
Press to exit the Configuration management CONFIG package. 1. Select Connectivity category 2. Select Dataflow subgroup 3. Select a dataflow 4. Default option for the selected dataflow Figure 9-23: Default dataflow setting Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 452: Stand-Alone Scanner Scenario

Select the LocalArchive-Int.HD dataflow as default dataflow. In this configuration the local database is used for patient archiving. Images are stored to internal hard drive. Image review The same dataflow is used for review on the system. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 453: A Stand-Alone Scanner And A Stand-Alone Echopac Pc Environment

EchoPAC PC environment In this scenario the EchoPAC PC (one or several) is used for review of studies acquired on one or more Vivid S5/Vivid S6 without being connected via a private or a local area network. Images can be stored on the scanner’s internal hard drive (recommended), on a dedicated MOD, or on a CD/DVD.
Page 454
Stand-alone scanner and a stand-alone DICOM workstation In this scenario a DICOM workstation is used for review of studies acquired on one a Vivid S5/Vivid S6 without being connected via a private or a local area network. Figure 9-26: A stand-alone scanner stand-alone DICOM workstation…
Page 455: A Scanner And Echopac Pc In A Direct Connect Environment

Scanner’s connectivity configuration If working in a peer-to-peer connection with a crossover cable between a Vivid S5/Vivid S6 and an EchoPac PC, the default delivery TCP/IP settings should be used. If working in a network, follow the procedure described below to configure the scanner.
Page 456
Figure 9-28: TCP/IP setting In the IP settings area enter: • The IP address for the scanner • The subnet mask for the scanner • The IP address for the Default Gateway Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 457
EchoPAC PC. Patient demographics, measurements and reports are transferred on the fly when entering the information on the Vivid S5/Vivid S6. Review on the EchoPAC PC workstation Select the LocalArchive-Int.HD dataflow on the EchoPAC PC (can be configured as default dataflow).
Page 458
Press Today to dis- play today’s exams RemoteArch-RemoteHD. to ease the search. Make sure that the option Copy images is checked. The examination done offline can now be reviewed on the workstation. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 459: A Scanner And Echopac Pc In A Network Environment

A scanner and EchoPAC PC in a network environment In this scenario the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 is configured to work with an ImageVault 4.0 or an Image Vault 7 patient demographics and image server in a network environment. Images are first saved on the local image buffer on the scanner and transferred to the server when saving the examination.
Page 460
Press Today to dis- play today’s exams RemoteArch-RemoteHD. to ease the search. Make sure that the option Copy images is checked. The examination done offline can now be reviewed on the workstation. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 461: A Scanner And A Dicom Server In A Network

A scanner and a DICOM server in a network In this scenario the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 is configured to work with a DICOM server in a network environment. Images are first saved on the local image buffer on the scanner. At the end of the examination the images are sent to the DICOM server via a DICOM spooler.
Page 462
CONFIG Select the Connectivity category and Dataflow subgroup. The Dataflow sheet is displayed. Select the DICOM dataflow to configure in the Name pull-down menu (see Figure 9-29). Figure 9-29: The Dataflow sheet Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 463
Properties (see Figure 9-30). 1. Select the DICOM device. 2. Press Properties. Figure 9-30: Display of the DICOM device Properties window The Properties window for the selected DICOM device is displayed (Figure 9-31). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 464
(or press Add if creating a new IP address). The Enter name and IP window is displayed. • Enter the name and/or IP address of the server and press OK to return to the Properties window. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 465
• Check Allow multiframe. DICOM SR DICOM Structured Reporting (SR) is a standardized format for medical results. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 and EchoPAC PC support the specialized form for Adult Echo Ultrasound («Supplement 72») for M&A results. With the DICOM SR support, M&A for an exam can be sent at the end of the exam or when exported from local archive.
Page 466
SCP) or a removable media (DICOM Media) depending on the DICOM dataflow selected. «Supplement 72» does not support all M&A results from Vivid S5/Vivid S6 and EchoPAC PC. «Supplement 72» limits the information that is possible to send to the following: •…
Page 467
Selected devices pane and press Properties. The Properties window for the selected DICOM device is displayed. Press Search criteria. The Search criteria window is displayed. Select a Search criteria from the Select tag pull-down menu. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 468
Press Add to list. Press OK to close the Search criteria window. 1. The dataflow sheet 2. The Properties window for the Worklist device. 3. The Search criteria window Figure 9-34: Adjusting the Search criteria Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 469
After offline acquisition, the images stored on the DICOM spooler are automatically sent to the DICOM server when connecting the system. Press to display the ALT+S DICOM spooler (see «DICOM spooler» on page 479 for further details). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 470: Export/Import Patient Records/Examinations

Export/Import patient records/examinations Patient records/examinations from the local archive on one system (Vivid S5/Vivid S6 or EchoPAC PC) can be exported to the local archive on another system via a removable media. Patient records/examinations from the local archive can also be exported directly to a remote archive (Echo server, DICOM server or EchoPAC PC depending on the environment).
Page 471
(see page 459). • DICOM Print: prints images to a DICOM printer via DICOM spooler. • MPEGvue: exports examinations to MPEGVue format readable from a regular computer. Ultrasound images Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 472
If not, a dialogue window is displayed prompting the user to insert a media. Insert media and select Retry. Figure 9-37: Insert media window • The system is checking if the destination media is empty Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 473
Note: If Eject is selected, the user is prompted to insert another media. If No is selected, the Export Dialogue window is displayed (Figure 9-35), where the user can select another destination. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 474
(see Figure 9-40). For each conflicting item, select: Keep: to keep the existing examination in the destination archive. Replace: to replace the existing examination with the corresponding item in the source archive. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 475
CD drive. The Eject device menu is displayed. Figure 9-41: The Eject device menu 13. Select the relevant media. The selected removable media is ejected. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 476
Select the dataflow Misc Export in the Name pull-down menu. Figure 9-42: The Dataflow Sheet Configuring an Excel Export Select the Excel storage device in the Selected devices pane and press Properties. The Excel properties window is displayed. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 477
Destination pull-down menu. must be entered Check the options as required. once in the Remote Select OK and press Path field before CONFIG they can be selected from the Destina- tion pull-down menu. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 478: Importing Patient Records/Examinations

USB flash drive device. • DICOM CD/DVD: imports DICOM data only from a CD/DVD-R/W. • DICOM Memstick: imports DICOM data only from a USB flash drive device. • Remote Import/Export Archive: imports raw and Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 479
Import patient • Fill out the Exam between field to display the patient window if neces- records done during a specific time period and select the sary. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 480
10. Press OK. A check mark is displayed in the Copied field in the Import patient window for each item imported. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 481
A status message is displayed for each item imported. Make sure that the operation was successful for each item imported. 11. Press Done in the Import patient window to complete the process. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 482: Disk Management

When the images are deleted from the local hard drive by the auto-purge function, the copied images are retrieved. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 483: Configuring The Disk Management Function

Configuration of the Disk management system can only be done by user with administration rights. Press CONFIG If required, log on as administrator. Select the Admin category. In the Admin category, select the sheet Data Management. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 484
This setting should be set based on the activity of your office/institution. If None is selected, no reminder is displayed. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 485
If using removable media, it is recommended to use dedicated media to the Disk management process. Removable media used for data backup must not be used when performing Disk CAUTION management. Do not use the same removable media on several systems. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 486: Running The Disk Management Function

465). Make sure that the correct configuration is set. Figure 9-48: The Disk management welcome screen Press Next. The Storage size information window is displayed (Figure 9-49). Verify the information displayed. If using removable media, the operation may require several Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 487
Insert a removable media into the specified drive. The disk The media does not need to be format- does not need to be formatted. ted. Press Next. The Copying files window is displayed (Figure 9-50). Figure 9-50: The copying files window Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 488
When all the files are copied, the media is automatically ejected. Press Next to continue. The Summary window is displayed (Figure 9-51), showing a list of the disks used. Figure 9-51: The summary window Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 489: Data Backup And Restore

GE Medical Systems is not responsible for lost data if the suggested backup procedures are not followed and will not aid in the recovery of lost data.
Page 490
In the Search/Create patient, select the dataflow Local Archive — Int. HD (Figure 9-52). Figure 9-52: Dataflow selection for backup Press CONFIG Select the category Admin. Select the Backup sheet (Figure 9-53). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 491
The following situations may occur: Path field. • The system is checking that the removable media is inserted. If not, a dialogue window is displayed (Figure 9-54) prompting the user to insert a media. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 492
Disk management copy on the media. If the following error message is displayed, the disk is ejected and the user is asked to use a new media that does not contain any backup or Disk management data. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 493
Figure 9-57: Backup progress windows 12. At the end of the process, the media is ejected and the Backup completed window (Figure 9-58) is displayed. Figure 9-58: Backup completed window Select OK. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 494
File the media in a safe place. Restore procedure Press CONFIG Select the category Admin. Select the Restore sheet (Figure 9-60). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 495
The Restore procedure OVERWRITES the existing data on the local hard drive. Make sure to select the correct device. CAUTION If restore is done from a backup on a removable media, insert the media in the drive. Select Restore now. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 496
10. Select OK to reboot the system. If connectivity configuration settings have been restored, make sure to save the TCP/IP settings: select Config/Connectivity/TCPIP and select Save settings. The system needs to be restarted again. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 497: Dicom Spooler

On the alphanumeric keyboard, press and hold down the key and press The DICOM spooler window is displayed (see Figure 9-63). The DICOM spooler window is automatically updated. Press Refresh to update the information displayed at any time. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 498
Trackball to the job to re-send in the DICOM job spooler Only jobs that failed or are in hold window. can be resent. Note: Several jobs can be selected. Press Trackball to Resend. Press Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 499
Trackball to the job to hold in the DICOM job spooler window. Note: several jobs can be selected. Only inactive jobs can be set on hold. Press SET. Trackball to Hold. Press SET. To undo hold, press Resend. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 500: Database Import From Vivid 3 Or Vivid 4

This is a one-time procedure which will normally be performed by your GE representative, during the system’s installation. The database imported from the Vivid 3 /4 into Vivid S5/Vivid S6 should only be imported during the installation, while the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 archive is still empty. Importing the database at…
Page 501
Press ESC to close the window. Press Config, then select Admin. The Admin dialog window is displayed (see Figure 9-65). Figure 9-65: Config menu — Vivid 3/4 DB Import Select the V3V4 DB Import tab. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 502
12. Repeat steps 3 and 5 above for the Local Archive + Int. HD dataflow. Note: The user is now able to review the imported data on the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 system. The images may be loaded at a later stage in the normal review process, as described in this manual.
Page 503: Installing The Vivid 3/4 Data Viewer

Type dolphin in the password field, then click OK. The files are extracted into a new Patients folder, located under the dedicated path on the hard disk. Proceed to the following procedure — Formatting. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 504
The Start formatting V3/4 Data Viewer window appears (see Figure 9-71). Select a language. Type any password you wish to use into the password field. This later provides privacy protection to your Vivid 3/4 Data Viewer database. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 505
100% and the Stop button is grayed-out (see Figure 9-72). Figure 9-72: Formatting complete Note: Depending on the database size, formatting may take several hours. In case you need to stop the process Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 506: Using The Vivid 3/4 Data Viewer

When prompted for a password, type in the password you defined in step 4 of the previous procedure (see «Formatting» on page 486). The Data Viewer database opens in Excel (see Figure 9-73). Figure 9-73: Vivid 3/4 Data Viewer Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 507
Identify and locate the exam of interest in the Index_patient tab. Click the corresponding Patient Index number to see all of the relevant measurements for that particular exam. Click on same Patient Index to return to the main Index_patient tab. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 508
Archiving Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 509
• Saving the report template …………530 • To exit the Report designer …………530 • Report templates management ……….. .. 531 • Configuration of the Template selection menu ……532 • Export/Import of Report templates ……….. 533 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 510: Introduction

Report Introduction The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 system enables the creation of patient and examination reports containing measurements, images and analysis that were made during the examination. The layout of the reports is defined by generic templates delivered with the system. Custom templates can also be made.
Page 511: Creating A Report

The default template for the current examination, or the template last used, is displayed (see Figure 10-1). The information entered during the examination in automatically filled out (e.g. demographic, Diagnosis, Comments etc.) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 512
Report 1. Assigned keys • Print • Store • Retrieve • Template menu MORE • Insert Text • Save as • Delete • Designer Figure 10-1: The Report screen and assigned keys Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 513
To replace an image in the report, select and drag an image from the clipboard over the image to replace in the report. • To remove an image from the report, select and drag the image to remove outside the report page. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 514: To Print A Report

Alternative storage Reports can also be saved in a user-defined locations in the following formats: • Compiled HTML (.CHM) files: readable from any web browser. • Portable Document Format (.PDF) files: readable with Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 515: Retrieving An Archived Report

A list of the available reports for the actual examination is displayed. The default name for a report is of type: <template type>_<store date>_<store time> Trackball to the report to delete. Press Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 516: Structured Findings

Archive information box to deselect all parameters. Select Structured findings, Findings conclusion Indication codes and Billing codes in the Exam Information field (Figure 10-2). Select OK. Save the Report template and exit the Report designer. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 517: Starting Structured Findings

Structured Findings structure The diagnostic statements are organized in tab folders (see Figure 10-3). Each tab folder may contain: • Underlying tab folders that contain Tab sheets. • Tab sheets that contain diagnostic statements. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 518
Check box statement: when selected the statement is included in the report. • Combo box statement: create a statement by selecting one alternative text among several choices. • Statement group: create several statements by selecting multiple check box statements. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 519: Using Structured Findings

Note: select Normal to select only normal statements from the current tab sheet (see page 508 for more information on how to define normal statements). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 520
(e.g. the {EF} tag refers to EF measurement). These statements require that the actual measurement is done to display correctly in the report. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 521
2. Statement inserted in the Findings field only. 3. Findings preview field 4. Conclusion preview field 5. Remove all selections. 6. Insert normal findings for the current tab sheet. Figure 10-5: Structured Findings window Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 522: Structured Findings Configuration

Report category. CONFIG Select the Structured Findings tab. The Structured Findings configuration screen is displayed (Figure 10-6). Or from within Structured Findings: • Press on the control panel and select Config. UPDATE MENU Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 523
9. Hide selected tab or statement from the Structured Finding window 10. Set the selected statement as normal 11. Rest factory default findings 12. Export/import findings. Figure 10-6: Structured Findings configuration screen Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 524
The system is always using the Findings text from the highest item in the structure as a heading for the selected underlying statements. • Enter the appropriate codes. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 525
• Enter a name in the Label field (tab name). • Enter a description in the Findings text field. If required: • Enter the appropriate codes. Note: to enter several codes separate each code by a space. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 526
• Enter a conclusion in the Conclusion text field (optional). Note: if the Conclusion text field is left empty, the statement text will be used as conclusion when selected. If required: • Enter the appropriate codes. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 527
The following procedure describes how to create a combo box statement. 1. Configuration window 2. Structured findings window Figure 10-10: New combo box statement Create a new statement as described above. A check box statement is created by default. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 528
). Each underlaying entries are changed to check box statements. Editing a statement Tab label, statements and statement alternative texts can be edited. In the Structured Findings configuration window (Figure 10-6), select the item to edit. Make the required changes. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 529
Figure 10-11: Insert parameter window Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 530
Factory reset cannot be undone. CAUTION Select Reset. The Reset statements window is displayed. Select: • Yes to reset all statement to the factory default (No undo). • No to cancel the operation. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 531
CAUTION In the Structured Findings configuration window (Figure 10-6), select Import. A browsing window is displayed. Browse to a destination and select Open. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 532: Direct Report

1. Open Direct report 2. Select the type of information 3. Create/insert pre-defined text 4. Text field 5. List of measurements completed 6. Exits the Direct report Figure 10-12: The Direct report Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 533: Creating Pre-Defined Text Inputs

Press More>> to display the full text for the selected entry. Creating pre-defined text inputs This feature is described in «The Comment texts sheet» on page 613. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 534: Report Designer

The Report designer screen is displayed with the selected template in the Report template design area (see Figure 10-14). Report designer overview 1. Menu bar 2. Report template design area Figure 10-14: The Report designer screen Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 535
The user can choose whether to save the updates or restore the original template. Menu Description Edit • Delete: remove the selected object from the report template. • Undo: restore the previous state of the report template. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 536
• Fixed text: insert a container with static text. The text typed during the creation of the container will be displayed in the report. Menu Description Preferences • Page color: sets the default background color for the template page. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 537: Designing A Report Template

Report template design area. Press Insert and select Table. The Container properties window is displayed (see Figure 10-15). Adjust the parameters as desired. Press OK. The table is displayed in the template. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 538
CD or MO disk. Select the location where to insert the logo (a table cell or directly in the report template). Select Insert and Logo. The Logo box is displayed. Figure 10-16: The Logo box Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 539
Select Insert and Fixed text. The Fixed text box is displayed. Figure 10-17: The Fixed text box Enter the text and specify the appearance. Select OK. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 540
Select the Information parameters to be displayed in the first cell. Select Box properties to change the font, alignment, appearance, etc. Select OK. Select the next table cell and repeat steps 3 to 6 to enter the remaining archive information. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 541
You may display the measurements over several columns using a table container as described below. Insert a table for the measurements to the desired location. Select the first table cell. Select Insert and Measurements. The Measurement box is displayed. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 542
The list of the inserted measurements is displayed in the Selected measurement list on the right side. Press OK. Select the next table cell and repeat steps 3 to 8 to insert several measurements. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 543
• Referral reasons: displays the information entered in the Direct report (see page 514) or in the Examination list window. • Comments: displays the information entered in the Direct report (see page 514) or in the Examination list window. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 544
The corresponding Wall motion scoring box is displayed. Figure 10-22: The Wall motion scoring box (Cut planes) Adjust the parameters and select OK. The scoring diagrams are inserted in the report template. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 545
Modifying the container’s specific properties Move the Mouse cursor over the border of the container to edit. The mouse cursor is changed to a cross Double-click on the Left mouse button. The Container box is displayed. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 546
Figure 10-24: The Page setup box Adjust the printing orientation. Define the header and footer for the printed report, by typing text and entering the required variables listed in the table below. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 547
Patient date of birth {exd} Examination date {prd} Current date (printing date) {prt} Current time (printing time) {cp} Current page {tp} Page count Subsequent entries are centered Subsequent entries are right aligned Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 548: Saving The Report Template

• Yes: to save the report template and exit the application. • No: to exit the application without saving the changes made in the report template. • Cancel: to return to the application. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 549: Report Templates Management

To access to the Report templates sheet: Press and select the Report category. CONFIG The Report category sheet is displayed. Figure 10-26: The Report template sheet Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 550: Configuration Of The Template Selection Menu

Sorting the templates in the Template selection menu In the Report template menu field, select the template to move. Press the Up or Down arrow buttons The selected template is moved accordingly in the Template selection menu. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 551: Export/Import Of Report Templates

Export/Import of Report templates User-defined report templates can be exported to a removable media and imported from the removable media into another system (Vivid S5/Vivid S6 / EchoPAC PC). Export of Report templates Insert a removable media into the drive.
Page 552
Figure 10-28: The Import template window Select the source device from the pull-down menu. Press OK. A Confirmation window is displayed. Press OK. The templates are imported into the system. Press and select the media to eject. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 553
Chapter 11 Probes • Probe overview …………….537 • Supported probes …………..537 • Vivid S5 Probe/Application Overview ……..542 • Vivid S6 Probe/Application Overview ……..543 • Maximum probe temperature ……….. 544 • Probe orientation …………..545 • Probe labelling …………….. 546 •…
Page 554
Probes • Surgery/Intra-operative Use …………574 • Preparing for Surgery/Intra-operative Procedures ….574 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 555: Probe Overview

Probes Probe overview The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 ultrasound unit supports four types of probes: • Phased Array Sector • Linear Array • Curved Array (Convex) • Continuous Wave Doppler Supported probes Phased Array Sector probes Probe Mode Intended use Technical data…
Page 556
Foot print: 14 x 48 mm Small parts Color Flow PW Doppler 9L-RS 2D mode Peripheral Frequency: 4.0–13.0 MHz vascular M-Mode Foot print: 14 x 52 mm Small parts Color Flow PW Doppler Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 557
Foot print: 23 x 10 mm Color Flow Obstetrics FOV: 133 degrees PW Doppler Pelvic Doppler probes Probe Mode Intended use Technical data Image 2D-RS CW Doppler Cardiology Frequency: 2.0 MHz (P2D) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 558
Frequency: 2.9-8.0 MHz Cardiology M-Mode Color Flow CW Doppler PW Doppler 9T-RS 2D mode Transesophageal Frequency: 4.0–10.0 MHz Cardiology M-Mode Color Flow CW Doppler PW Doppler * Applicable only for Vivid S6. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 559
5.0-13.0 MHz M-Mode Thoracic Foot print: 14 x 33 mm Vascular and Color Flow abdominal PW Doppler Pediatric Small parts Musculo-skeletal Musculo-skeletal Superficial Peripheral vascular * Excluding direct contact with the heart Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 560: Vivid S5 Probe/Application Overview

LVO Stress Musculoskeletal Neo Head Nerves Obstetrics Pediatric Pelvic Pharm Stress Renal Small Parts Small Organs Superficial Transcranial Thyroid Vertebral Note: Some of the above applications depend on the availability of certain options Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 561: Vivid S6 Probe/Application Overview

LVO Stress Musculoskeletal Neo Head Nerves Obstetrics Pediatric Pelvic Pharm Stress Renal Small Parts Small Organs Superficial Transcranial Thyroid Vertebral Note: Some of the above applications depend on the availability of certain options Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 562: Maximum Probe Temperature

Thermal phantom at 23 +/- 3 °C for all probes. b: Temperature rise is measured and added to 33 for External-Use probes or 37 °C for Non External-Use probes. Probe placed upright in contact with above thermal phantom. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 563: Probe Orientation

1. LED 3. V-mark on screen: indicates the orientation of the probe to the scan. 2. Notch Figure 11-1: Orientation marking on probe and on screen Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 564: Probe Labelling

Operating frequency • Model number • Probe serial number • Year of manufacture The probe name is displayed on the probe housing. 1. CE mark 2. Probe name Figure 11-2: Probe labelling (examples) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 565: Environmental Requirements

Probes should be operated, stored, or transported within parameters outlined in Table 2-1, page 53. Ensure that the probe face temperature does not exceed normal operation temperature range (see table on page 544). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 566: Probe Integration

Connecting the probe Probes can be connected at any time, whether the unit is on or off. Vivid S5: 3 type RS ports Vivid S6: 3 type RS ports and one type OR port to support TEE probes Figure 11-3: Probe ports Do not allow the probe head to hang freely.
Page 567
Rotate the locking handle to the full vertical position to lock in place. Take the following precautions with the probe cables: • Keep free from the wheels. CAUTION • Do not bend cable sharply. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 568: Activating The Probe

CAUTION Check that the correct TI category is displayed (see «Thermal Index» on page 26). TIB must be displayed when a fetal application is selected. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 569: Disconnecting The Probe

Rotate the lock handle counter-clockwise to the horizontal position to unlock the connector. Pull the connector straight out of the probe port. Verify that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage case. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 570: Care And Maintenance

Follow the maintenance schedule below to ensure optimum operation and safety: After each use • Inspect the probe • Clean the probe • If required disinfect the probe Before each use • Inspect the probe Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 571: Inspecting The Probe

Probes Inspecting the probe If any damage is found, DO NOT use the probe until it has been inspected and released for further use by a GE service representative. CAUTION After each use Inspect the lens, the probe housing and the cable (Figure 11-4).
Page 572: Special Handling Instructions

Lubricants in these condoms may not be compatible with probe construction. CAUTION DO NOT use an expired probe sheath. Before using probe sheaths, verify whether the term of validity has expired. CAUTION Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 573
However, ultrasound transducers are complex and expensive devices that must be reused between patients. It is very important, therefore, to minimize the risk of disease Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 574: Cleaning And Disinfecting Probes

Transesophageal and intraoperative probes require a special handling. Refer to the user documentation enclosed with these probes. CAUTION You MUST disconnect the probe from the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 prior to cleaning/disinfecting the probe. Failure to do so could damage the system. CAUTION…
Page 575
Disinfecting probes In order to provide users with options in choosing a germicide, GE Medical Systems routinely reviews new medical germicides for compatibility with the materials used in the transducer housing, cable and lens. Although a necessary step in…
Page 576
Wipe dry with a soft towel or air dry the probe. CREUTZFELD-JACOB DISEASE Neurological use on patients with this disease must be avoided. WARNING If a probe becomes contaminated, there is no adequate disinfecting means. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 577
«CAUTION — Dangerous voltage» (the lightning flash with arrowhead) is used to indicate electric shock hazards. Biohazard — Patient/user infection due to contaminated equipment. Usage: • Cleaning and care instructions • Sheath and glove guidelines Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 578
Thoroughly clean the probe, as described earlier before CAUTION attempting disinfection. You MUST disconnect the probe from the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 prior to cleaning/disinfecting the probe. Failure to do so could damage the system. DO NOT soak probes in liquid chemical germicide for longer than is stated by the germicide instructions for use.
Page 579
Methyl or Ethyl Parabens (para hydroxybenzoic acid) • Dimethylsilicone Returning/shipping probes and repair parts US Department of Transportation and GE Medical Systems policy requires that equipment returned for service MUST be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual…
Page 580: Probe Safety

Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage. For a detailed description of the safety guidelines see «Probe Safety» on page 32. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 581: Biopsy

The biopsy option is intended for use by a duly licensed physician who has received the appropriate training in biopsy techniques as dictated by current relevant practices, as well as in proper operation of the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 ultrasound unit. Precaution concerning the use of biopsy procedures Do not freeze the image during a biopsy procedure.
Page 582
Improper cleaning methods and the use of certain cleaning and disinfecting agents can cause damage to the plastic components that will degrade imaging performance or increase the risk of electric shock. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 583: Preparing The Biopsy Guide Attachment

CIVCO User’s Guide. The Ultra-Pro II™ allows for accurate placement for ultrasound-guided biopsy and drainage procedures. The needle guide directs instruments according to on-screen system software guidelines. The Ultra-Pro II features a Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 584
Read the following instructions and the user’s guide for the Ultra-Pro IITM Needle Guide kit before using the biopsy equipment. WARNING Bracket attachment procedure Identify the appropriate biopsy guide bracket as shown in Figure 11-6. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 585
Probes Probe Bracket Probe with Bracket 3S-RS 4C-RS 8L-RS 9L-RS 12L-RS E8c-RS Figure 11-6: Biopsy Guide Brackets Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 586
Make sure the bracket is firmly attached to the probe. 3S probe: tighten the biopsy bracket to the probe by locking the lever lock. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 587: Displaying The Guide Zone

• Yellow represent 1 cm increments. • Red represents 5 cm increments. The display should be carefully monitored during a biopsy for any needle deviation from the center line or guidezone. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 588
Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 589: Endocavitary Probe Biopsy Guide Assembly

Place an adequate amount of ultrasound gel inside the sheath tip (the gel is between the sheath inner surface and the probe aperture). Note: Ensure that only acoustic coupling gel is used for this purpose. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 590
CAUTION Figure 11-12: Civco Disposable Biopsy Guide (approx. 5° Angle) Place an adequate amount of ultrasound gel on the gel-filled sheath tip’s outer surface. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 591: Biopsy Needle Path Verification

Perform cleaning and disinfection of the probe as described in page 556. Dispose the sheath, bands and needle guide after use, according to medical regulations for biohazardious waste. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 592: Surgery/Intra-Operative Use

Place the proper sterile sheath over the probe and cord. Depending on the type of procedure, use either sterile water or sterile gel on the sheath cover. Figure 11-13: Applying Sterile Sheath Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 593
• DVR (Digital Video Recorder) …………578 • Overview ……………… 578 • Using the DVR …………….. 578 • Configuring the DVR …………..581 • Reviewing the DVR Media Externally ……..581 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 594: Introduction

Peripherals Introduction This chapter provides information on peripherals that can operate with the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 ultrasound unit, as follows: • Color Thermal Video Printer • Black & White Thermal Video Printer • Integrated Digital video Recorder (DVR) Use only GE Medical Systems approved internal equipment when replacing an internal peripheral.
Page 595: Printing

Peripherals Printing The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 ultrasound unit can support a color and a black & white thermal video printer. The printer devices are controlled from the key on the control panel. PRINT key can also be configured to perform alternative PRINT storage (i.e.
Page 596: Dvr (Digital Video Recorder)

About 20 seconds after entering the media label, the DVR status icon will display a «Stop» icon, and is now ready for recording the first chapter. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 597
«Pause» indicator will appear. Press the Record button to toggle between pause and record. Note: When recording is resumed after pause a new chapter is created. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 598
• 2D Freeze button — When the Freeze button has been pressed, use the «2D Freeze» button to run or stop looping the last few seconds of captured playback frames. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 599: Configuring The Dvr

It may assist to record and playback a screen test-pattern. To generate a test pattern, use the Test pattern button available on the LCD adjustment Soft menu Controls (see page 90). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 600
Peripherals Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 601: Presets And System Setup

• Dataflow ………………. 616 • Additional outputs …………..623 • Tools ………………625 • Formats ………………626 • TCP-IP ………………632 • System ………………. .. 633 • The system settings …………..633 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 602
Presets and System setup • About ………………..635 • Administration …………….. 636 • Users ………………637 • Unlock Patient …………….640 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 603: Introduction

Presets and System setup Introduction This chapter describes the configuration management package of the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 ultrasound unit. The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 configuration package enables users to customize the global configuration for the unit and the application-specific settings. In addition, users with administration rights have access to the local archive backup function, local archive restore function and creation of users.
Page 604
Admin configure existing dataflows. • Additional outputs Configure the key. PRINT • Tools Formats removable media. • Formats Configures the Examination list window display and other options related to the patient management. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 605
• Unlock patient Unlock patient records that were Admin not properly finished. Service This sheet is for service staff Admin only. Deals with printer definition and keyboard configuration. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 606: Starting The Configuration Package

The Log In window is displayed asking for operator ID and password (see Figure 13-1). Select Log on when completed. The Setup dialogue window is displayed (see Figure 13-2). 1. Select the operator 2. Type password Figure 13-1: The Operator login window Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 607: Overview

1. Sublevel tabs for the selected Setup category. 2. Setup categories 3. Selected Setup category Figure 13-2: The Setup dialogue window structure Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 608: Imaging

The Global setup sheet Figure 13-3: The Global setup sheet Flex Button configuration The Flex button can be configured to function as any button on the keyboard with the exception of alphanumeric and soft-menu sections. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 609
Doppler Parameter Description Doppler: • Show KHz scale: when selected, displays the KHz scale on the left side of the Doppler spectrum (see page 164). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 610
Title bar (see page 98). • Anonymous patient: when checked, no patient information is displayed on the scanning screen’s Title bar. Scan Info Parameter Description Scan Info: • selects scan information on the video record. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 611: Application

The Application category enables the configuration of probe/application specific settings (presets). The application-specific settings can be stored and used as default presets with this probe. Figure 13-4: The Application setup sheet (example) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 612
Selects particular M&A categories to be associated with a specific probe and preset. Auto invert on steer: In Color flow, the color bar is inverted when steering the color flow sector angle. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 613
APPLICATION Highlight the probe and press Trackball to Presets… A pop-up window Enter new name: appears, displaying the current preset name. Press Save to store the changes. Applicable only on user-defined applications. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 614: Application Menu

The Application menu can be configured by moving the applications up and down inside the pop-up menu and from one level to the other. To move an application inside one level Trackball to the application to move. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 615
Applications menu till the application has moved to the other menu. To delete an application Trackball to the application to delete. Press Press Delete. Applicable only to user-defined applications. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 616: Measure Text

Factory default Measurement menu and the creation of user-defined Measurements. 1. Configuration window (see next pages for 2. The measurement menu (displays updated details) configuration) Figure 13-6: The Measurement menu setup sheet Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 617
Measurement menu in the configuration window. Configuration tools: Deletes selected entry (folder or measurement) in the Measurement menu. The factory entries cannot be deleted. Moves selected measurement or folder up or down inside the Measurement menu. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 618
: The item is hidden from the Measurement menu. Only checked parameters will be displayed in the Measurement result window, the worksheet and the report. Auto sequence: : Prompts the next measurement in the folder. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 619: Configuration Of The Measurement Menu

Selection of a Measurement category Trackball to the Measurement menu heading. Press The measurement categories are displayed in a sub-menu. Trackball to the measurement category of interest. Press The measurement category is displayed. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 620
Name text field. Adding a measurement to a folder The user can either add a pre-defined measurement or create a new measurement with user-defined parameters to a folder (see page 339 for more information). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 621: The Advanced Sheet

Select the configuration value next to the parameter to When pointing at a parameter an expla- configure. nation label is dis- A pull-down menu is displayed (see Figure 13-7). played. Select a new value from the pull-down menu. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 622: The Modify Calculations Sheet

In the Modify Calculations sheet, select Vascular next to M&A Categories. The Vascular measurement category is displayed. Select Carotid. The available calculations are displayed. Check the desired calculations to be performed. Select Save. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 623: The Ob Table Sheet

• OB Table Template: when creating a new OB table, select Template (1 — 7) which you want to use as the basis of the user programmable OB Table (see page 607). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 624
Enter the Min, Max and Interval values in the Parameters field. The system automatically fills in the MEAS column. Enter the input values for the MEAN and SD columns. 10. Select Exit to save. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 625
Template 2 (based on Tokyo) Fetal age Format: MEAS MEAN Unit: Table range: 1 SD Graph range: 1 SD Measurement Value: [cm] result [#w#d] [day (+/-)] Fetal growth Format: MEAN Unit: Others are same as above Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 626
Value: [cm] result [#w#d] [%] Calculated by Fetal growth table. If Fetal growth table is not edited, GP is not calculated. Fetal growth Format: MEAN Unit: weekday Others are same as above Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 627
Value: [cm] result [#w#d] [%] Calculated by Fetal growth table. If Fetal growth table is not edited, GP is not calculated. Fetal growth Format: MEAN Unit: weekday Others are same as above Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 628
Value: [cm] result [#w#d] [%] Calculated by Fetal growth table. If Fetal growth table is not edited, GP is not calculated. Fetal growth Format: MEAN Unit: weekday Others are same as above Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 629: Report

Examination list window (see Figure 9-10, page 418). • Structured findings: enables the insertion of pre-configured structured diagnosis statements and Billing/Accreditation codes in the patient report (see «Structured Findings» on page 498). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 630: The Diagnostic Codes Sheet

In the Code field enter a name for the diagnostic code. Trackball to the Text input display area. Press Enter the text. To add a diagnostic code to an examination refer to «Diagnosis code» on page 420 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 631: The Comment Texts Sheet

The pre-defined text list is organized in a three level hierarchy. Selecting one item in the first column displays pre-defined text entries related to the selected text in the second and third column. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 632
Select the second or third column. Press New. The Enter new text window is displayed (Figure 13-13). Enter a title in the Text field. Enter the pre-defined text in the Full text field. Press OK. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 633
Deleting a pre-defined text input Select the item to delete in one of the columns. Press Delete. A Confirmation window is displayed. Press Yes. The selected text input is deleted including the belonging text inputs. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 634: Connectivity

• TCPIP: internet protocol configuration Dataflow Communication between the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 ultrasound unit and other information providers on the network takes the form of dataflows. Each dataflow defines the transfer of patient information and images from an input source to the unit, and from the unit to one or several output sources.
Page 635
3. Store data directly to archive dataflow 4. Hide selected dataflow from the list of available 7. Adjust the settings for the selected assigned dataflow device Figure 13-15: The sublevel Dataflow (example) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 636
A remote database is used for patient HD/DICOM Server archiving. Images are stored to a network image volume and to a DICOM server. Some of the measurements are stored if DICOM SR is turned on (see page 447) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 637
Vivid HL7 Gateway. The patient list in the Search/Create Patient window is coming from Vivid HL7 Gateway through DICOM Modality Worklist. All patient data and images are stored to a server. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 638
Vault) is used for patient archiving. Images are stored to a network image volume (either internal HD on EchoPAC workstation or Image Vault volume) and a MPEG exam is created to the configured destination. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 639
Raw compression is active only if the setting Allow raw data is checked. Max Framerate Select 25, 30 or Full from the pop-up menu. Full (original acquisition) is default. Compression Select compression type or no compression. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 640
Send a request to a PACS, asking it to permanently archive image(s) MPPS Modality Perform Procedure Step: send information (typically to a HIS) that a scheduled exam has been started, performed or interrupted. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 641: Additional Outputs

3. Output devices assigned to the current button. 7. Printer configuration (see page 577) 4. Add or remove selected device to/from the current button. Figure 13-16: The sublevel Additional outputs (example) Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 642
• Secondary Capture: screen shot Capture Area Select between: • Video Area (1) • Whole Screen (2) To remove a device, select the device in the Selected devices field and press the Left arrow button. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 643: Tools

The user can define a default remote path for a network shared folder (\server-nameshare-name). The remote path can then be selected as a destination archive for the following operations: • Export traces function in Q-Analysis • Export of system error log file Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 644: Formats

Wait for the display of the Information window indicating that the process is completed. Formats The Formats sublevel enables configuration of the Examination list window (see Figure 9-10, page 418) and other tools related to patient management, as described below. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 645
Select the action to perform: ing border. • Insert: creates a new column • Delete: removes selected column • select the desired information to be displayed in the selected column. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 646
Presets and System setup 1. Insert new column to the left of the selected column 2. Delete selected column 3. Select column heading Figure 13-19: Configuration of the Examination list window Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 647
97, page 415 and page 417), : All the searching filters are displayed as default. : The searching criteria are restricted to a minimum. When unchecked, press More to display all the searching filters. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 648
ID number. : Patient ID is required when entering a new patient in the archive. Request acknowledge of End Exam action: : The user is asked to confirm action when ending an examination. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 649
• No extra info • Add visible patient info in the DICOM images: displays patient information (name, date of birth and ID) on DICOM images. • Add titlebar: adds the Titlebar to the DICOM images. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 650: Tcp-Ip

5. Advanced DICOM log: creates a detailed DICOM related report log. Should be used only if DICOM issues are registered (see page 646 about report log generation). Figure 13-20: The sublevel TCP/IP Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 651: System

• Test: enables testing of the different parts of the unit. This sheet is accessible to users with administration rights only. The system settings Figure 13-21: The System settings setup sheet Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 652
2000: the number 20 is automatically displayed when entering the year in the patient date of birth (to edit century, press twice). BACKSPACE None: four digits must be typed when entering the patient year of birth. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 653: About

Units Parameter Description Units: Select the desired units (Metric or US) from the pop-up menu. About The About sheet gives informations about the ultrasound unit concerning: • software • hardware • Probes Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 654: Administration

(e.g. referral doctors, sonographers etc.) • System Administration: keeps track of all the options implemented in the unit. • Unlock patient: enables to unlock patient records that were not properly terminated (see page 640). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 655: Users

Referring groups: members of these groups (Diagnosing physician and Referring doctor) are not allowed to login on the system. They are registered as references that can be associated to a patient record. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 656
• Create, update and delete an user or a referring member • Import/Export patient records, examinations • Move examinations Print report • Print a report Store report • Store a report Admin • System administration Service • Access to the service platform Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 657
Set the time span (from 10 min) for the system to automatically get locked when not in use. When the system is locked, the current user may either log on again or the system may be restarted by a different user. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 658: Unlock Patient

You can search for a specific patient record or a group of patient record using the searching filters. Select Unlock to unlock the selected patient record(s), or select Unlock All to unlock all patient records. A Confirmation window is displayed. Select OK. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 659
• Using InSite ExC …………….650 • InSite ExC Functionalities …………650 • Initiating a Request for Service (RFS) ……..650 • Clinical Lifeline Mode …………… 653 • Exiting InSite ExC …………..654 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 660: System Care And Maintenance

Only trained persons are allowed to perform the safety inspections mentioned above. Technical descriptions are available on request. To ensure that the Vivid S5/Vivid S6 unit constantly operates at maximum efficiency we recommend that the following procedures be observed as part of the customer’s internal routine maintenance program.
Page 661: Cleaning The Unit

This significantly reduces the risk of a virus attack on Vivid S5/Vivid S6. GE is continuously judging the need for additional actions to reduce…
Page 662
Rinse the cloth/sponge with clean running water and wipe the Control Panel again. Use a dry, soft, lint-free cloth to dry the Control Panel. Wait for the Control Panel surfaces to dry completely. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 663: Prevention Of Static Electricity Interference

• Spray carpets with anti-static spray because constant walking on carpets in or near the scanning room may be a source of static electricity. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 664: System Self-Test

User maintenance System self-test The Vivid S5/Vivid S6 ultrasound unit is designed for reliable operation and consistent, high-quality performance. Automatic self-testing facilities are provided to monitor system operation and to detect malfunction as soon as possible, thereby eliminating unnecessary downtime. The detection of any serious malfunction may result in immediate interruption of scanner operation.
Page 665
This generates a larger, more detailed log-file. Note: extensive logfiles can grow considerably over time. When the feature is not needed, turn it off in order to conserve the size of the logfiles. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 666
Select Time Range. Define the time range using the From and To fields. Alternatively, select Bookmarks. This generates logfiles which are limited to one hour before through one hour after the selected bookmark. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 667
Problem description dialogue window again. Select the destination where to export the logfile (MOD or CD-R). Press Save and Export. A Zip file (named “logfile_<date>_<time>.zip”) is copied on to the selected removable media. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 668: Using Insite Exc

User maintenance Using InSite ExC InSite ExC is your direct link with a GE Online Service Engineer, or Applications Support Engineer, or a Request for Service. The system enables you to get online assistance promptly, and monitor and follow up the status of your requests.
Page 669
The items marked with a red asterisk are required fields and the requested information must be typed in the relevant fields. Figure 14-6: Contact Information dialog box Figure 14-7: Contact Problem Description Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 670
Select the Queue tab (see Figure 14-9) to check the status of your request. Figure 14-9: Screen showing status of requests in queue To identify which users have sent service requests, click the Users tab (see Figure 14-10). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 671: Clinical Lifeline Mode

10 minutes to 15 seconds so that your call can be answered as quickly as possible, as well as enabling Disruptive mode (where Technical Support can establish a remote control link with your system). Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 672: Exiting Insite Exc

User maintenance Exiting InSite ExC Click at top right corner of the screen to exit InSite ExC. After you have finished using InSite ExC, reboot the system. Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 673
Annotations ………………128 – Configure ………………132 Editing ………………..131 Erasing………………..131 Inserting ……………….. 128 Application selecting……………….. 100 Assignable keys ………………103 Audio Volume PW/CW Doppler…………….165 AutoEF ………………..292 AVI………………….408 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 674
Saving as AVI ………………408 Using ………………..112 Circumference parameter …………… 325 CIVCO………………… 565 Cleaning Ultrasound unit ………………643 Color 2D Using ………………..162 Color maps Color Mode ………………160 CW Doppler ………………166 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 675
Configuration see System setup Connecting peripherals …………….58 Connecting the unit ……………… 54 Connectivity Buttons………………..623 Dataflow ……………….. 616 Overview ………………. 616 Continuous capture …………….205 Contour 2D ………………… 146 LV Contrast ………………238 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 676
Diagnosis code ………………420 Diagnosis information …………….419 DICOM spooler ………………479 DICOM verification………………625 Diff On/Off 2D …………………. 146 Diff on/off LV Contrast………………238 Digital Video Recorder …………….578 Direct report ……………….. 514 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 677
Controls………………… 126 Edge Enhance, M-Mode…………….. 153 EFW ………………….. 330 Ejection Fraction, automated…………..292 Emission declaration …………….44 Estimated Fetal Weight …………….330 Event timing……………….. 265 eVue ………………….. 410 Examination Starting………………..95 Export Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 678
CW Doppler ………………167 LV Contrast………………236 M-Mode ………………… 151 Optimizing Color Mode …………..163 Optimizing CW Doppler …………..168 Optimizing M-Mode …………….155 Optimizing PW Doppler …………..168 PW Doppler ………………167 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 679
PW Doppler………………165 Images Saving as JPEG…………….408 Import Patient records……………… 460 Intima-Media Thickness …………….. 303 Invert 2D ………………… 143 Color Mode ………………159 CW Doppler ………………165 Optimizing Color Mode …………..163 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 680
Color Mode ………………159 CW Doppler ………………165 Optimizing Color Mode …………..163 Optimizing CW Doppler …………..168 Optimizing PW Doppler …………..168 M&A ………………….333 Magneto Optical Disk Formatting ………………625 Measurements Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 681
Needle Guidance Systems…………..565 normal values ………………340 OB application ………………321 OB exam ………………..317 OB graphs ………………..359 OB measurements …………….. 322 OB Multigestational …………….366 OB parameter configuration …………..333 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 682
Activating ………………. 550 Care and Maintenance …………..552 Cleaning ……………….. 556 Connecting ……………….87 Disconnecting ………………551 Disconnecting and connecting…………. 87 Disinfecting ………………558 Intra-operative use…………….574 Labelling ……………….. 546 Orientation markers …………….545 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 683
Optimizing the trace display………….. 394 Overview ………………. 379 Sample area………………386 Strain cursor………………386 To generate a trace…………….386 Trace smoothing …………….395 Radial Averaging Color Mode ………………161 Optimizing Color Mode …………..163 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 684
Retrieving ………………497 Save ………………..496 Report designer ………………516 Designing a template…………….. 519 ROI size Color Mode ………………161 Safety………………..13 – Biological hazard …………….. 36 Electrical hazard ……………… 35 Equipment safety…………….. 35 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 685
Site requirements ………………53 Soft Menu Rocker………………. 103 using ………………..107 Strain …………………. 183 Controls………………… 184 Optimizing ………………186 Overview ………………. 183 Using………………..186 Strain cursor ………………. 386 Strain rate………………..178 Controls………………… 179 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 686
Patient information…………….592 Scan information…………….592 Starting system setup ……………. 588 Units ………………..633 Unlock Patient ………………. 640 User configuration …………….637 TCP-IP ………………..632 TGC see Time Gain Compensation…………144 Threshold Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 687
Strain rate ………………180 Tissue Synchronization Imaging …………190 Tissue Tracking…………….. 175 TVI ………………..171 TSI………………..170 TSI, see Tissue Synchronization Imaging TVI………………….169 Controls………………… 170 Optimizing ………………172 Overview ………………. 169 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…
Page 688
Color Mode ………………159 Optimizing Color Mode …………..163 Velocity range Optimizing CW Doppler …………..168 Optimizing PW Doppler …………..168 Virtual Convex………………196 wheels………………….. 64 Width 2D …………………. 142 LV Contrast………………236 Worksheet………………..353 Vivid S5/Vivid S6 User Manual R2424458-100 Rev. 2…

This manual is also suitable for:

Vivid s6

Источник

E-mail (используется для входа) *

Краткая информация о себе, как специалисте (специализация, ученая степень и т.п.)

Аппарат и направления УЗИ, с которыми Вы работаете

На каком ультразвуковом аппарате Вы работаете?

добавить аппарат

С какими направлениями ультразвуковой диагностики вы работаете?

	Отметить все / снять все
	Акушерство		Абдоминальные исследования
	Гинекология		Сердечно-сосудистые исследования
	Маммология		Мускуло-скелетные исследования
	Урология		Поверхностно-расположенные органы
	Педиатрия		Другие направления

Источник

Класс прибора:

Высокий

Количество аппаратов на складе:

1 штука

Состояние:

Отличное

Монитор:

ЖК 15 дюймов

Управление аппаратом:

На русском языке

Количество портов для подключения датчиков:

3 активных

Режимы:

В, М

Доплеры:

ЦДК — цветовое доплеровское картирование
ЭД — энергетический доплер
PW — импульсно-волновой доплер
CW — непрерывно-волновой доплер

+ЭКГ модуль

Датчики:

Конвексный 2-5.5 МГц

(+ 50 000 рублей к стоимости)

Микроконвексный 4-10 МГц

(+ 100 000 рублей к стоимости)

Линейный 4-12 МГц, 40 мм

(+ 50 000 рублей к стоимости)

Внутриполостной 6-10 МГц

(+ 50 000 рублей к стоимости)

Фазированный датчик 1.5-3.6 МГц

(+ 50 000 рублей к стоимости)

Фазированный датчик 2-5 МГц

(+ 50 000 рублей к стоимости)

Инструкция:

На русском языке

Страна производства:

Израиль

Регистрационное удостоверение:

Действующее

Стоимость аппарата без датчиков:

Нет в наличии

Источник

Manuals
Brands
GE Manuals
Medical Equipment
Vivid S5 N
Service manual

Bookmarks

Quick Links

P R E L I M I N A R Y

Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N

Service Manual

Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N software v12.x

11.SEP.2015

FN091065_BSP-BT12-VS5N-

BASIC SERVICE DOCUMENTATION.

Part Number: FN091065

Revision: 2

Related Manuals for GE Vivid S5 N

Summary of Contents for GE Vivid S5 N

Page 1
P R E L I M I N A R Y 11.SEP.2015 FN091065_BSP-BT12-VS5N- Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N Service Manual Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N software v12.x BASIC SERVICE DOCUMENTATION. COPYRIGHT GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY. © 2013 and 2015 General Electric Company. All Rights Reserved.
Page 3
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Important Precautions TRANSLATION POLICY…
Page 4
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL…
Page 5
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL…
Page 6
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL…
Page 7
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL…
Page 8
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL…
Page 9
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL…
Page 10
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL viii…
Page 11
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL…
Page 12
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL…
Page 13
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL…
Page 14
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL…
Page 15
GE personnel. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
Page 16
The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written permission of GE. GE may revise this publication from time to time without written notice. TRADEMARKS All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.
Page 17
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Revision History Revision Date Reason for change 2013 APR 23 Initial release (per BT12). 2015 SEP 11 Updated content. List of Effected Pages (LOEP) Pages Revision…
Page 18
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL This page was intentionally left blank.
Page 19
Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N Battery Safety ……1 — 14…
Page 20
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL CHAPTER 2 Site Preparations Overview …………2 — 1 Purpose of Chapter 2 .
Page 21
Configuration ……….. . . 3 — 80 Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N Configuration ……3 — 80 Service Screen Set-up .
Page 22
Storing and Transporting the Unit ……..3 — 186 Safety Precautions for Moving the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N Unit ..3 — 186 Cardboard Shipping Carton and Packaging Materials .
Page 23
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL CHAPTER 4 Functional Checks Overview…………4 — 1 Purpose of Chapter 4 .
Page 24
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL CHAPTER 5 Components and Function (Theory) Overview …………5 — 1 Purpose of Chapter 5 .
Page 25
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL ECG Module …………5 — 50 Overview .
Page 26
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL CHAPTER 6 Service Adjustments Overview …………6 — 1 Purpose of Chapter 6 .
Page 27
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL CHAPTER 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting Overview…………7 — 1 Purpose of Chapter .
Page 28
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL CHAPTER 8 Replacement Procedures Overview …………8 — 1 Purpose of Chapter 8 .
Page 29
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Rotary Knob Replacement Procedure ……8 — 91 ATGC Keycap Replacement Procedure .
Page 30
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL How to Restore User-defined Presets ……8 — 233 Peripherals — Replacement Procedures .
Page 31
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL CHAPTER 9 Renewal Parts Overview…………9 — 1 Purpose of Chapter 9 .
Page 32
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL CHAPTER 10 Care and Maintenance Overview …………10 — 1 Periodic Maintenance Inspections .
Page 33
1-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 1 This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing the Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N ultrasound scanner. The service provider must read and understand all the information presented here before installing or servicing a unit.
Page 34
Provides disassembly and reassembly procedures for all Field Replaceable Units (FRUs). • Chapter 9 — Renewal Parts Contains a complete list of field replaceable parts for the Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N ultrasound scanner. • Chapter 10 — Care and Maintenance Provides periodic maintenance procedures for the Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N ultrasound scanner.
Page 35
Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N Models Covered in this Manual The Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N models documented in this manual are shown in Table 1-2 below. Table 1-2 Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N Models and Hardware/Software Compatibility SYSTEM APPLICATION MODEL SOFTWARE SOFTWARE CAT NO.
Page 36
No upgrade from Vivid S5 N to Vivid S6 N is possible. 1-1-6 Purpose of Operator Manual(s) The Operator Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system, and also kept near the unit for quick reference.
Page 37
Conventions Used in this Manual 1-2-1-1 Model Designations This manual covers the Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N ultrasound units listed in Table 1-2 «Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N Models and Hardware/Software Compatibility» on page 1-3. 1-2-1-2 Icons Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they will reinforce the printed message.
Page 38
Some others icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed. NOTE: The Vivid Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N system has no unintended or motorized moving parts that could cause pinching; all moving parts are mechanically operated by the user. Pay attention to move such parts carefully (e.g.
Page 39
• Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only. • Only personnel who have participated in a Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N Training Seminar are authorized to service the equipment. • Local laws may restrict this device for sale or use by or on the order of a physician.
Page 40
ANUAL DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, ONLY install GE approved parts. DO NOT perform any unauthorized modification of the equipment. DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT WARNING…
Page 41
IMPACT. EVEN IF THE PROBE APPEARS TO BE UNBROKEN, IT MAY IN FACT BE DAMAGED. THE Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N portable ultrasound scanner WEIGHS 65KG (144 LBS.) OR MORE, CAUTION DEPENDING ON CARRY-ON PERIPHERALS WHEN READY FOR USE.
Page 42
POSITION THE OPERATING PANEL IN ITS CENTERED AND LOCKED POSITION. LOWER THE OPERATING PANEL AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE BEFORE MOVING THE SYSTEM. Do not transport the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system in a vehicle without locking the WARNING WARNING casters (wheels) and securing it as described in Section 3-8 «Storing and Transporting…
Page 43
NOTE: For detailed information on handling endocavity probes, refer to the appropriate supplementary instructions for each probe. In addition, refer to the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N User Manual for detailed probe handling instructions. Chapter 1 — Introduction…
Page 44
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 1-3-4-2 Peripherals Safety and Environmental Guidelines Environmental Dangers WARNING WARNING All devices meeting IEC60950 must be kept outside the patient environment as defined in IEC60601-1-1, unless the devices, according to IEC60601-1-1, are equipped with the following: A) Additional Earth Protection…
Page 45
1 — Patient environment Figure 1-1 Patient environment When connecting a peripheral directly to the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N scanner, if a network cable CAUTION (RJ45 LAN) is used, the cable shielding should not be soldered to the LAN connector.
Page 46
Do not apply solder to a battery. • Do not connect the battery to an electrical power outlet. In the event that the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound scanner will not be used for a WARNING WARNING long period, it is recommended to remove the battery from the system while not in use.
Page 47
NOTE: When shipped, the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N with the battery it is in a state of being approximately 30% charged. Before use, it is necessary to fully charge and discharge the battery pack up to 3 times, in order to utilize Li-lon smart packs.
Page 48
DANGER THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING. If the covers are removed from an operating Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system, some WARNING WARNING metal surfaces may be warm enough to pose a potential heat hazard if touched, even while in shut down mode.
Page 49
5.) Control all stored and residual energy. 6.) Verify isolation. All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy is relieved. ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N. WARNING WARNING WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS: 1.
Page 50
1-5-1 Product Labels (Label, General info) The following tables show the Product Labels (Label, General info) found on the Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N ultrasound units. All the labels and icons are described in Table 1-7 «Product Icons» on page 1-20.
Page 51
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 1-5-1 Product Labels (Label, General info) (cont’d) Table 1-6 Product Labels, Vivid S5 N Description Label Label, General Info, BT12 Chapter 1 — Introduction 1-19…
Page 52
1-5-2 Label Descriptions and Locations The following table shows the labels and symbols that may be found on the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, and provides a description of each label’s purpose and location. Table 1-7…
Page 53
Do not push Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N sideways when casters are in break position. Instability may occur.
Page 54
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 1-7 Product Icons (cont’d) Label Name Description Location Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Disposal This symbol indicates that waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of On the base of the unit.
Page 55
Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N External Labels In addition to the labels described in the previous section, additional labels may be found on the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in the following sections: •…
Page 56
Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances. GE Healtcare policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GE Healtcare employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/ equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment.
Page 57
RF fields, magnetic fields and power line transient requirements. For applicable standards refer to the Safety Chapter in the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N User Manual. NOTE: For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh and clamps are in good condition and installed tightly without skew or stress.
Page 58
Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances. GE Healtcare policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GE Healtcare employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/ equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment.
Page 59
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 1-8 Customer Assistance 1-8-1 Contact Information If this equipment does not work as indicated in this service manual or in the user manual, or if you require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource, as listed below.
Page 60
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 1-8 Phone numbers for Customer Assistance 1-28 Section 1-8 — Customer Assistance…
Page 61
VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 1-8-2 System manufacturer Table 1-9 System manufacturer MANUFACTURER PHONE NUMBER FAX NUMBER GE VINGMED ULTRASOUND A/S STRANDPROMENADEN 45 +47 3302 1100 +47 3302 1350 P.O. BOX 141 NO-3191 HORTEN NORWAY Chapter 1 — Introduction 1-29…
Page 62
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL This page was intentionally left blank. 1-30 Section 1-8 — Customer Assistance…
Page 63
2-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 2 This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the installation of a Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit. Included are descriptions of the electrical and facility requirements that must be met by the purchaser.
Page 64
2-2-2 Cooling Requirements The cooling requirement for the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit environment is 3500 BTU/hr. This figure does not include the cooling required for lights, people, or other equipment in the room. NOTE: Each person in the room places an additional 300 BTU/hr demand on the environmental cooling.
Page 65
If possible, begin these checks as many as six weeks before system delivery. Only one person is required to unpack the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit; at least two CAUTION people must be available to roll the system down the wheeling ramp. Attempts to move the system considerable distances (or on an incline) by one person alone, could result in personal injury, and/ or damage to the system.
Page 66
The Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N portable ultrasound scanner is supplied with a mains power plug, as standard. In the event that the unit arrives without a power plug, or with the wrong plug, contact your GE dealer. When necessary, the installation engineer will supply the appropriate power plug to meet the applicable local regulations.
Page 67
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 2-2-5 Electrical Requirements (cont’d) 2-2-5-5 Power Stability Requirements • Voltage drop-out Max 10 ms. • Power Transients (All applications) Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient, including line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients.
Page 68
RF gaskets touch metal. a different, appropriate location. The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding. Use GE-specified harnesses Cable length, material, and routing are all important; do not make any changes that do and peripherals.
Page 69
(and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required. All electrical work on these products must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must utilize only qualified personnel to perform electrical servicing of the equipment.
Page 70
NOTE: All relevant preliminary network outlets installations at the prepared site must be performed by authorized contractors. The purchaser of GE equipment must utilize only qualified personnel to perform servicing of the equipment. 2-3-3 Site Recommendations The following are (optional) site recommendations.
Page 71
Ultrasound Room and depicting the minimal room layout requirements. Dedicated Power Outlets VIVID 3 Hospital Network GE Cabinet for Software and Manuals (optional) 36 IN. (92 CM) Figure 2-1 Recommended Floor Plan 4.3m x 5.2m (14 ft x 17 ft)
Page 72
2-3-4-4 DICOM Option Pre-Installation Requirements To configure the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit to work with other network connections, the network administrator must provide the required information, which should include the following: •…
Page 73
ANUAL Section 2-4 Connectivity Installation Worksheet Site System Information Comments: Floor: Site: Dept: Room: Type: Vivid S5 N or REV: Vivid S6 N SN: CONTACT INFORMATION Name Title E-Mail Address Phone Remote Archive Setup TCP/IP Settings (Echo Server/GEMNet Server/EchoPac PC)
Page 74
FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 2-4 Connectivity Installation Worksheet (cont’d) Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N IP Address Local Port Host Name AE Title Net Mask ROUTING INFORMATION GATEWAY IP Addresses Destination IP Addresses…
Page 75
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 2-4 Connectivity Installation Worksheet (cont’d) Table 2-7 Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N Pre-Installation Check List Action Schedule at least 3 hours for installation of the system.
Page 76
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL This page was intentionally left blank. 2-14 Section 2-4 — Connectivity Installation Worksheet…
Page 77
Overview 3-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 3 This chapter provides instructions for installing the Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N Ultrasound system. Before beginning the installation process, an appropriate site must be prepared, as described in Chapter Once the site has been prepared, installation can proceed as described in this chapter.
Page 78
3-2-2-1 System Acclimation Time Following transport, the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system may be very cold, or hot. Allow time for the system to acclimate before being switched ON. Acclimation requires 1 hour for each 2.5 C increment,…
Page 79
ULTRASOUND ENERGY CAN PRODUCE HEAT AND MECHANICAL DAMAGE Note: The Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N User Manual should be fully read and understood before operating the unit. Keep the manual near the unit for reference. Chapter 3 — System Setup…
Page 80
Figure 3-2 on page 3-6. Where the specific customer requirements are for a Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit with peripherals, this is shipped in a smaller-sized cardboard shipping carton mounted on a raised wooden base, or placed on top of the main cardboard carton that contains the scanner- see…
Page 81
If the carton is damaged, or if either the Drop or Tilt indicators have turned red (indicating damage incident), please inform the GE HEALTHCARE sales representative immediately. In addition, mark on the shipping consignment note or packing slip/post-delivery checklist (in the “Package” column) that the Tilt and/or Drop indicators show damage incident.
Page 82
157 cm (62 in) Plastic Straps Wooden Base FRONT Depth Width 87 cm (34 in) 73 cm (29 in) Note: Weight = 105 Kgs (231 lbs) Figure 3-2 Shipping Carton — Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N with Peripherals…
Page 83
Depth Width 87 cm (34 in) 73 cm (29 in) Note: Weight = 95 Kgs (209 lbs) Figure 3-3 Shipping Carton — Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N Only Table 3-4 Shipping Cartons — Dimensions and Weights Weight Description…
Page 84
3-3-1 Unpacking the Cardboard Shipping Carton As previously described, the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit is packed in a single cardboard shipping carton comprising a durable outer cardboard carton cover and a wooden platform base; these are firmly joined together with plastic straps.
Page 85
UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-3-1-2 Unpacking the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N 1.) Cut the two plastic straps securing the shipping carton to the wooden base — see Figure 3-3 on page 3-7. WHEN USING SHARP TOOLS TO OPEN PACKING MATERIALS, TAKE CARE TO AVOID CAUTION CUTTING OR DAMAGING ANY OF THE CONTENTS.
Page 86
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Wheeling Ramp (in upright position) Guide Rail Wooden Base Figure 3-6 Wheeling Ramp in Upright Position Note: The front side of the carton is reinforced with wooden guide rails and, when dropped down in the open position, these form a strong ramp used for wheeling the system out of the shipping carton.
Page 87
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6.) Lower the wheeling ramp into the unloading position, as shown in Figure 3-7 on page 3-11. Foam Supports Adhesive tape Console Holder Unscrew to remove…
Page 88
12.)Press down on the locking brake to unlock the wheel. Repeat for the three other wheels. 13.)Using two people, carefully roll the scanner forwards down the unloading ramp to remove it completely from the shipping carton. TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED WHEN MOVING THE Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N CAUTION SCANNER.
Page 89
100-120V AC — Americas, Japan and Taiwan. NOTE: Applicable to Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N systems with AC Distribution Box Type B or Type A. SETTING THE Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ULTRASOUND COMPONENTS TO THE WRONG…
Page 90
The shipping carton will contain the probes that have been ordered with the system. For a list of probes available for use with the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N portable ultrasound scanner, refer Section 9-9 «Probes» on page 9-16.
Page 91
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5.) From the Service screen, click Keyboard Setup. The Regional Language Option window opens — Figure 3-11. Figure 3-11 Regional Language Options window 6.) Select the Languages tab and in the next window click the Details…
Page 92
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7.) The Text Services and Input Languages window opens — see Figure 3-13. Figure 3-13 Text Services and Input Languages window 8.) From the Text Services and Input Languages screen, click Add.
Page 93
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Verifying the Language Change Once the language is installed, it is necessary to verify that the language change was correctly implemented.
Page 94
Visually inspect the contents of the shipping carton for damage. If any parts are damaged or missing, contact an authorized GE Service Representative. A Damage Inspection Checklist for the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N portable ultrasound scanner is provided Table 3-5 below.
Page 95
VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 3-5 Damage Inspection Checklist — Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N Systems (cont’d)  Step Item Recommended Procedure Check the power cord for cuts, loose hardware, tire marks, exposed insulation, or any deterioration. Verify continuity.
Page 96
Front View of the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N Ultrasound Unit Figure 3-15 below shows the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit components that are visible from the front and side of the ultrasound unit.
Page 97
Provides External ECG input connection to an ECG monitor device outlet, or direct patient three-contact ECG lead connection. Important: Do not use the Vivid 7 ECG cable with the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system. 12 Speakers: Two loudspeakers provided for Doppler sound.
Page 98
ERVICE ANUAL 3-4-3-3 Rear View of the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N Ultrasound Unit Figure 3-17 Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N Rear View Rear Cable Hooks: Provides a cable management solution for probes and ECG leads.
Page 99
Rear Panel of the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N Ultrasound Unit Figure 3-18 shows a view of the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit rear panel and external peripheral/accessory connectors: Figure 3-18 View of the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N Rear Panel Peripherals 230VA AC outlet, isolated — provides power to external peripherals connected to scanner.
Page 100
System Voltage Confirmation 3-4-4-1 System Voltage Settings Verify that the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound scanner is set to the correct voltage. The voltage settings are found on the system rear cover. Systems with Type-B Power Supply:…
Page 101
3-4-5 Ensuring Protection from EMI The Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured before the unit is put into operation.
Page 102
NOTE: If required, it is possible to disable access to all Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N scanner USB ports (including the CD/DVD drive) in order to limit system vulnerability. This is implemented from the System Configuration window, via the Service tab.
Page 103
Printers should be connected to the Vivid S5 N/ Vivid S6 N scanner using the USB Isolation Unit (P/N 5459394). This section provides information common to all printers approved for use with the Vivid S5 N/ Vivid S6 N ultrasound scanner, as follows: •…
Page 104
EVISION ERVICE ANUAL P1 and P2 Hot Key Configuration via Vivid S5 N/ Vivid S6 N Connectivity Settings 1.) Press Config (or F2); select Connectivity (in the lower part of window). 2.) Select the Additional Outputs tab. Figure 3-21 Configuring Control Panel Hot Keys for Printing 3.) From the Button drop-down menu (see…
Page 105
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6.) Select Configure. Figure 3-23 Printer Setup Screen 7.) From the drop-down menu, select the desired printer and press OK. 8.) In the Printer Properties window, select OK.
Page 106
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3.) From the Connectivity screen click the Tcpip tab. Figure 3-24 Additional Outputs Screen 3-30 Section 3-4 — Preparing for Installation…
Page 107
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4.) In the Tcpip window, click Advanced Settings. Click Advanced Settings Figure 3-25 Tcpip Tab Activated The Network Connection screen opens as seen in Figure 3-26.
Page 108
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7.) From the menu, select Printer and select the Set As Default Printer option to select the printer as the default printer or verify that the printer is the set as the default.
Page 109
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-5-1-1-3 Setting Printing Orientation (Portrait or Landscape) and Paper Size To change the printing orientation and printing paper size, configure the printer as described below. To configure printers for portrait/landscape printing, the change must be performed at the Windows operating system level.
Page 110
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4.) In the Orientation area, select Portrait or Landscape as needed. Figure 3-30 Printer Setup 5.) From the Paper Size drop-down list, select the required paper size. 6.) Click Properties.
Page 111
Any unauthorized peripherals may cause system failure or damage! NOTE: After connecting the printer to the Vivid S5 N/ Vivid S6 N system, proceed to the following procedures, as required: • ‘Configuring Printing Buttons P1 and P2” on page 3-27 •…
Page 112
‘Setting the HP 5400K DeskJet Color Printer as the Default Report Printer” on page 3-40. NOTE: After connecting the printer to the Vivid S5 N/ Vivid S6 N system, proceed to the following procedures, as required: • ‘Configuring Printing Buttons P1 and P2” on page 3-27 •…
Page 113
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-5-1-3-1 Configuring the HP 5400K DeskJet Color Printer for Connection via USB Port 1.) Log in to Windows® with Administrator permission. 2.) On the console, press the Config button (or F2) and click the Service tab at the bottom of the screen.
Page 114
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6.) Select the USB cable option for connecting the device to the computer, then click Next — see Figure 3-35 Figure 3-35 Connecting via USB Cable 7.) Follow the instructions on the Connect Your Device Now screen, (Figure…
Page 115
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 10.)Verify that the Report Printer, HP Office Pro K5400 is installed. This indicates that the printer has been successfully installed. Figure 3-37 Connectivity Screen 9.) If the HP Office Pro K5400 does not appear as the Report Printer, click Advanced…
Page 116
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-5-1-3-2 Setting the HP 5400K DeskJet Color Printer as the Default Report Printer 1.) Press Config (or F2). 2.) Select Connectivity (in the lower part of window). 3.) Select the Additional Outputs tab.
Page 117
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL The Print Setup dialog opens (Figure 3-41). Figure 3-41 Printer Setup Screen 6.) From the drop-down menu, select HP DeskJet K5400. 7.) If necessary, select Properties to set the required printing parameters (e.g.
Page 118
Figure 3-43 AC Power Cable (P/N 2300857) & USB Cable Connected to the Vivid S5 N/ Vivid S6 N System 1.) Connect the printer to the AC power outlet located at the rear of the Vivid S5 N/ Vivid S6 N system.
Page 119
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 2.) Using the USB communications cable, connect the printer to the Vivid S5/S6 system. The HP OfficeJet Pro 8000 printer power and communication ports are shown in Figure 3-44.
Page 120
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL The Connectivity Screen opens — see Figure 3-45 below. Figure 3-45 Connectivity Screen 6.) Activate the Additional Outputs tab, then click Advanced. The Printer properties screen opens — see Figure 3-46.
Page 121
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 3-47 Print Setup Screen 8.) In the Name field scroll down list (Figure 3-47), select HP OfficeJet Pro A809 Series. 9.) Under Paper, select the appropriate paper size.
Page 122
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3.) Switch on the printer, insert a few sheets of appropriate printing paper and press the left-most button on the printer’s panel — see Figure 3-48.
Page 123
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 3-50 Printers and Faxes Screen 3.) Click Add Printer. The Add Printer wizard opens. 4.) Click Next. The Local or Network Printer screen opens — see Figure 3-51.
Page 124
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL The Select a Printer Port screen opens — Figure 3-52. Figure 3-52 Select a Printer Port Screen 6.) Select Create a new port and in the drop-down list select Standard TCP/IP Port. 7.) Click Next.
Page 125
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 3-54 Additional Port Information Screen 9.) Under Device Type, select Standard and click Next. The Finish screen opens. 10.)Click Next.
Page 126
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Note: If the driver is already installed proceed as follows: a.) Click Next. The following screen appears — see Figure 3-56.
Page 127
14.)Select Do not share this printer and click Next. 15.)Print a test page and click Finish. NOTE: After connecting the printer to the Vivid S5 N/ Vivid S6 N system, proceed to the following procedures, as required: • ‘Configuring Printing Buttons P1 and P2” on page 3-27 •…
Page 128
Vivid S5 N/ Vivid S6 N SYSTEM NOTE: When connecting the printer’s network cable, ensure that it is connected to the network port at the rear of the Vivid S5 N/ Vivid S6 N system as shown in Figure 3-61.
Page 129
ANUAL Installation of the HP LaserJet CP2025/M451 Color Printer requires configuring the IP addresses for both the Vivid S5 N/ Vivid S6 N system and for the printer. There are two types of installations, as described below: “Peer-to-Peer” using a cross communication cable between the system and the printer.
Page 130
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5.) From “This connection uses the following items” scroll box, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties. Figure 3-62 Local Area Connection 2 Properties The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties screen opens.
Page 131
In the Subnet mask field type: 255.0.0.0 7.) Click OK and click Close. The Vivid S5 N/ Vivid S6 N system’s IP address is defined. Defining the Printer IP Address The settings for the HP LaserJet CP2025 / LaserJet M451 Color printer are controlled via the printer’s…
Page 132
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 3-8 Printer Control Panel — Legend to Figure 3-64 Description of Controls Control-panel display: The display provides information about the printer. Use the menus on the display to establish printer settings.
Page 133
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6.) Press OK. “Yes” is displayed in the control panel. 7.) Press OK again. The Subnet mask displays: 255.0.0.0 8.) Press OK.
Page 134
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 3-66 HP Color LaserJet CP2020 Series PCL 6 Network Properties Dialog Box 3.) Click Configure Port. The Configure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor dialog box opens. Figure 3-67 Configure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor 3-58 Section 3-4 — Preparing for Installation…
Page 135
3.) Select the required settings and click OK. 4.) Print a test page to confirm that the printer is properly installed. NOTE: After connecting the printer to the Vivid S5 N/ Vivid S6 N system, proceed to the following procedures, as required: •…
Page 136
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL The B&W Printer should connected to a designated USB port on the DIB board, as indicated in Figure 3-69. KB Data (J1) DVI DVR…
Page 137
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO USE A DIFFERENT TYPE OF B/W PRINTER (BRAND OR MODEL) WARNING WARNING OTHER THAN THE B/W PRINTER PROVIDED BY GE. THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM IS AN EXTREMELY SENSITIVE AND COMPLEX MEDICAL SYSTEM. ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERIPHERALS MAY CAUSE SYSTEM FAILURE OR DAMAGE!
Page 138
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4.) Navigate to Printers and Faxes and double click Sony UP-D897 to open the Sony UP-D897 Printer Configuration dialog. 5.) From the menu, select Printer >…
Page 139
Figure 3-75 Printing Preferences screen 8.) Click OK and return to the Connectivity screen. NOTE: After connecting the printer to the Vivid S5 N/ Vivid S6 N system, proceed to the following procedure, if required: • ‘Configuring Printing Buttons P1 and P2” on page 3-27…
Page 140
‘P1 and P2 Hot Key Configuration via Vivid S5 N/ Vivid S6 N Connectivity Settings” on page 3-28. The Digital Color Printer can be connected to either of the USB ports (upper or lower) on the rear connectors panel.
Page 141
Connecting the Color Video Printer 1.) Place the Digital Color Printer on a stable surface close to the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N scanner. 2.) Using the power cable (provided with the printer), connect one end of the power cable to the power IN socket at rear of the printer, and the other end to the printer peripherals outlet at the rear of the scanner.
Page 142
1-12. NOTE: All peripherals mounted on the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system must be firmly secured in position using the securing straps supplied with the scanner. These straps are fastened through the dedicated holes located on each side of the rear tray and serve to hold the peripheral firmly in place.
Page 143
The MOD Drive may be connected once the system is powered ON, or after shutdown. All software drivers for the MOD Drive are pre-configured and installed designated to be used with the specific MOD drive supplied by GE HEALTHCARE. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO USE A DIFFERENT TYPE OF MASS STORAGE DEVICE OTHER…
Page 144
ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERIPHERALS MAY CAUSE SYSTEM FAILURE OR DAMAGE! Refer to the External USB Hard Disk Installation Procedure section, page 8-243 for instructions on initial configuration and connecting the External USB Hard Disk to the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N scanner. 3-5-2-4…
Page 145
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 2.) Select Imaging, then activate the Application tab — see Figure 3-81. Figure 3-81 Application Tab Chapter 3 — System Setup 3-69…
Page 146
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3.) Using the Footswitch Functionality drop-down menus, select the required functionality for the Left, Middle and/or Right Footswitch — see the example in Figure 3-82 Figure 3-82 Footswitch Functionality Settings 3-70…
Page 147
3-5-3 Connecting Probes The Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit operates with various types of probes that are used for scanning patients, including flat phased, convex and linear electronic array probes. Once connected, the probes can be selected for different applications.
Page 148
Figure 3-84. LOGIQ TEE Pencil Figure 3-84 Connecting Probes to the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N 6) Move the connector locking lever to the right to lock the probe in place, as shown in Figure 3-84. 7) Carefully position the probe cord so that it is free to move and is not resting on the floor, placing the cable and probe head into one of the cable hooks or probe holders.
Page 149
NOTE: The ECG may be connected to the system at any time, whether the system is powered ON or OFF. Do not use the Vivid 7 ECG cable with the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system. NOTICE •…
Page 150
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL AHA (Americas, Japan) IEC (Europe, Asia, ROW) Figure 3-86 ECG Cable and Electrode Placement Note: For optimal ECG operation, use only electrodes that meet universal standards — see Table 3-1.
Page 151
The connection of the ultrasound unit to a power source should be performed by a qualified person who has completed basic Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N System User Training. Use only the power cords, cables and plugs provided by or designated by GE HEALTHCARE to connect the unit to the power source.
Page 152
PERFORMANCE AND COOLING PURPOSES. NOTE: Connecting electrical power to the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit involves preliminary checks of the power cord, voltage level and compliance with electrical safety requirements. 1) Ensure that the wall outlet is of appropriate type, and that the power circuit breaker is turned OFF.
Page 153
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Screw hole for Securing Plastic Cable Clamp Plastic Cable Clamp and Screw Figure 3-88 Plastic Cable Clamp and Securing Screw 6.) Proceed as follows: a.) Loosen the screw to open the plastic cable clamp (see Figure…
Page 154
ANUAL 3-5-5-3 Disconnecting the Ultrasound Unit from the Electrical Outlet WHENEVER DISCONNECTING THE Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N UNIT FROM THE ELECTRICAL CAUTION OUTLET, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. FIRST UNPLUG THE MAINS POWER CABLE FROM THE WALL OUTLET SOCKET, THEN FROM THE UNIT ITSELF.
Page 155
Detecting connected probes. 3) When prompted, log in to the system as appropriate. (Refer to the instructions for system login and user security setup as described in the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N User Manual). The system first enters 2D-Mode with the probe and application that were last used before the system was shut down.
Page 156
VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 3-6 Configuration 3-6-1 Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N Configuration 3-6-1-1 Enter Location Figure 3-91 Hospital and Department Name Table 3-2 Location Name Step Task Expected Result(s) Open the Configuration Window, see The System Settings Window is displayed.
Page 157
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-6-1-2 Date and Time Adjustments Figure 3-92 Date and Time Adjustments Table 3-3 Date and Time Adjustments Step Task Expected Result(s) Figure 3-91 on Open the System (Configuration) Window, see…
Page 158
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-6-1-3 Language Selection Language Figure 3-93 Settings — Language Selection Table 3-4 Language Adjustments STEP TASK EXPECTED RESULT(S) Open the Configuration Window, see ‘Log On to the System as ADM”…
Page 159
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 3-4 Language Adjustments STEP TASK EXPECTED RESULT(S) The Regional and Language Options dialog box opens: For Russian and Greek languages only: Reboot the system and, at the Windows level, navigate to the Control Panel.
Page 160
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-6-1-4 Units of Measure Units Figure 3-94 Select Units of Measure Table 3-5 Select Units of Measure STEP TASK EXPECTED RESULT(S) Open the Configuration Window, see ‘Log On to the System as…
Page 161
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-6-2 Service Screen Set-up 3-6-2-1 Overview The Service Screen gives you access to: • Keyboard Setups • Printer Setup •…
Page 162
Figure 3-97 LCD Adjustments on Vivid S6 N Systems Figure 3-98 LCD Adjustments on Vivid S5 N Systems For instructions, see ‘LCD Display Adjustments and Calibration” on page 6-1.
Page 163
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-6-2-5 Keyboard Setup 1) Press <F2>, select Service Tab. Select Keyboard layout Select Keyboard setup Figure 3-99 Select Keyboard Setup 2) From the Keyboard layout pull-down menu, select the desired layout and click CHANGE.
Page 164
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-6-2-5-1 Regional Options • Select appropriate Format and Location, then click Apply. Figure 3-100 Regional Options 3-88 Section 3-4 — Preparing for Installation…
Page 165
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-6-2-5-2 Languages 1.) Under the Languages tab, click Details to select appropriate Language. 2.) If necessary, activate applicable Supplemental Language Support check box, then click Apply. Figure 3-101 Languages Chapter 3 — System Setup 3-89…
Page 166
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-6-2-5-3 Advanced 1.) Under the Advanced tab, select a language version of the non-unicode programs you want to use, then click Apply.
Page 167
Windows Installation Wizard. Normally, all software drivers are pre-installed and there is no need to use this functionality. In special cases where there is a need, follow the instructions provided by GE HEALTHCARE or the instructions in the respective printer installation manual. Select Add Printer Figure 3-103 Select Add Printer 1.) Select ADD PRINTER to start the Add Printer (Installation) Wizard.
Page 168
Configuring Peripherals 3-6-3-1 Approved Peripherals The following lists the internal peripherals available for use with the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N scanner and details their method of connection: • Printer — Black & White, digital, Sony (via USB).
Page 169
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-6-3-3 Virtual Printing (Optional) Virtual printing is not configurable. The functionality of virtual printing provides the ability to print to a specific printer, even though it is not physically connected.
Page 170
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 3-107 Resuming Spooled Print Job 4.) Right-click and select Restart to resume print job/s for printing, as required 3-94 Section 3-4 — Preparing for Installation…
Page 171
3-6-4-1 Software Option Installation A Password (Software Option String) enables a software option or a combination of software options. This password is specific for each Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N. 3-6-4-2 On-site Configuration 1.) Press CONFIG (F2) and log on as Adm — see ‘Log On to the System as ADM”…
Page 172
3-7-1 Connectivity Introduction The Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit can be connected to various connectivity devices, such as DICOM devices and EchoPac servers. The following sections describe how to connect the system to a remote archive/work station or a DICOM service, using a TCP/IP connection.
Page 173
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL • Automatically send images to DICOM PACS after End Exam? Y/N • DICOM SR? Y/N Note: If the answer to some of the above is Yes, perform the required steps in the procedure below to select the appropriate dataflow according to your needs.
Page 174
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4.) Click on Properties. The Worklist Properties dialog box opens: Figure 3-112 Worklist Properties Dialog Box 5.) Select the appropriate settings to configure the Worklist (IP address, etc), as required. 6.) When done, click OK to close the dialog box.
Page 175
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 9.) Select the appropriate settings to configure Dicom Storage (e.g. Name: DICOM Storage 1, etc. as shown in Figure 3-113).
Page 176
The name indicates that the local database is used for patient archiving and images are stored to internal hard drive. A list of all the predefined dataflows is included in the Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N User’s Manual. 3-100…
Page 177
In this scenario, the EchoPAC PC (one or several) is used for review of studies acquired on one or more Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N scanners without being connected in a network. Images can be stored on the scanner’s internal hard drive (recommended) or on a dedicated MOD.
Page 178
Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N and a DICOM Server in a Network In this configuration, the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N is configured to work with a DICOM server in a network environment. Usually, this will be the hospital network. Images are first saved on the local image buffer on the scanner.
Page 179
ANUAL 3-7-2 Physical Connection 3-7-2-1 Ethernet Switch Connections An Ethernet Switch (P/N: 066E0741), is used to connect the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system to an EchoPAC PC and a network printer. Ethernet Cable Informative LEDS connectors MDI Button…
Page 180
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-7-2-3 Hospital Network Connection to EchoPAC PC Workstation Using standard non-crossed cables and MDI switch set to position =HUB, connect like this. Wall connection Vivid S6 or Vivid7…
Page 181
ANUAL 3-7-2-4 Wireless Network Configuration The following procedure is used to configure the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system for a wireless network environment. NOTE: A Wireless Network adaptor must be connected to the lower USB port located at the rear of the system.
Page 182
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL The “Network Connections” dialog box is displayed: Figure 3-121 Network and Dial-up Connections 5.) Navigate to “Wireless Network Connection 8″ and double-click to open the Wireless Network Connection 8 screen — see Figure 3-122.
Page 183
At the end of a successful Network Detection process, a message displays indicating that the network is connected — see Figure 3-125. Figure 3-125 Confirmation of Successful Wireless Network Connection The Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system is now configured for a wireless network environment. Chapter 3 — System Setup 3-107…
Page 184
‘Ethernet Switch Connections” on page 3-103. Connection via Hospital Network You will need one network cable to connect the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N to a wall outlet on the hospital’s network. 3-7-2-8 Connection between a Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N and a DICOM Server on a Network You will need one network cable.
Page 185
ANUAL 3-7-3 Connectivity Configuration NOTE: If connected to a stand-alone network (Peer-to-Peer network with a Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N scanner, an EchoPAC PC work station and eventually a network printer), you should use default delivery settings. 3-7-3-1…
Page 186
Figure 3-128 TCP/IP Set-up for Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N 3-7-3-5 Vivid S5 N/ Vivid S6 N Remote Path Configuration The Vivid S5 N/ Vivid S6 N Remote Path feature enables the user to define a user name. 3-110 Section 3-4 — Preparing for Installation…
Page 187
EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-7-3-6 Configuring the Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N Remote Path NOTE: Before starting this procedure, verify that the destination PC / Network has a Shared folder (remote path) with user permissions. Refer to section 3-7-9-1-1 on page 3-146 for creating a new user in the remote PC or network.
Page 188
(This is the password usually assigned by the local IT person). 3-7-3-7 Configuring the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N and Network PC for a Peer-to-Peer Connection NOTE: The following steps are performed on the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N scanner.
Page 189
The IP must be different from the IP address used for network computer. 12.)Type in the Subnet mask 255.255.255.0. Note: The Subnet mask should be the same for both the network computer and the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N. 13.)Click OK 14.)Press the Config button on the control panel to close all windows and return to the regular scanning…
Page 190
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL NOTE: The following steps are performed on the Network Computer. 1) On the network computer, access the Control Panel, as follows: a.) Double-click on My Computer icon on desktop.
Page 191
6.) Activate the Use the following IP address check box. 7) Type in the network computer’s IP address 10.0.0.2. Note: The IP address must be different from the one used for the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system. Type in the Subnet mask 255.255.255.0. Note: The Subnet mask should be the same for both the network computer and the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N.
Page 192
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4.) Trackball to the Advanced tab and press the Set button on the control panel. Figure 3-135 Connectivity Dialog Box — TCPIP Advanced Tab 5.) Select the Local Area Connection, as shown in Figure 3-130.
Page 193
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box opens. Figure 3-137 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 10.)Activate the Use the following IP address check box. 11.)Type in the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N IP address 10.0.0.1 or the one provided by the local network administrator. Note: The IP must be different from the IP address used for network computer.
Page 194
Connect the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N and network computer LAN connection using a regular Network cable. The Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N and the network computer are now ready for export, import of files. 3-118…
Page 195
ERVICE ANUAL Note: One can check the connection by pinging to the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N IP, as follows: a.) Select <Start>, <Run> b.) Type CMD, then press <Enter> c.) Type Ping and IP 10.0.0.1 for Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N then press <Enter>.
Page 196
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-7-4 Set Up Connection to a DICOM Server in a Network NOTE: Typically, DICOM server (PACS) is configured as part of another dataflow (for example, Local Archive — DICOM Server).
Page 197
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL The selected flow is shown, as seen in the example in Figure 3-141 below (Worklist/Local Archive — DICOM Server/Int. HD). Figure 3-141 Worklist/Local Archive — DICOM Server/Int.
Page 198
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 3-143 DICOM Server’s Properties Dialog Box 8.) Follow the steps below to change the IP-Address settings: a.) From the IP-Address pull-down menu, select <Modify> to display the IPs dialog box. Figure 3-144 Select <Modify>…
Page 199
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Name IP address Figure 3-146 Edit Name and/or IP address d.) Click OK to save the new settings and close the Edit Name dialog box. e.) Click OK to close the IPs dialog to return to the Properties dialog box.
Page 200
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-7-4-3 Verify the Connection to a Device 1.) Select (highlight) the device to which you want to verify the connection. Select device to be verified.
Page 201
3-7-5-1 Introduction The procedures below describe how to set up the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N workstation so it can connect to the Hospital Information System (HIS), via the Vivid HL7 Gateway. By connecting to the HIS, demographic information (i.e. Patient ID, Name, Gender, etc.) can be retrieved from the HIS, reducing “double-work”…
Page 202
6.) Ensure that the service is displaying the value In for the Dir parameter and that its role is Primary. Test Connectivity with the Vivid HL7 Gateway The purpose of this test is to verify that the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N has connectivity with the Vivid HL7 Gateway.
Page 203
Modality Worklist service. Troubleshoot Connectivity with the Gateway If connection between the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N and the HIS failed, the following are typical causes: 1.) No network connection. 2.) IP address and/or port number was incorrectly entered when configuring the Gateway Modality Worklist service.
Page 204
1.) Path provided in Export to HL7 export path was incorrect. 2.) Mitra support personnel did not create the user account for the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N. 3.) The POLL_DIR directory on the Vivid HL7 Gateway was not shared or the permissions are incorrect.
Page 205
Overview The Query/Retrieve function makes it possible to search for and retrieve DICOM data from a DICOM server for further analysis on the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N. 3-7-6-2 Query/Retrieve Setup on the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N 1.) Press CONFIG (F2) and log on as Adm, as described in…
Page 206
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 3-151 Query/Retrieve Workflow 5.) Select QueryRetrieve so it is highlighted and then select Properties to display the Properties dialog box.
Page 207
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL IP-ADDRESS DOWN-ARROW AE TITLE PORT NO Figure 3-153 DICOM Query/Retrieve properties 6.) Select the IP-address down-arrow to choose the DICOM Query/Retrieve server from the pull-down menu.
Page 208
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL SEARCH CRITERIAS SELECT TAG ADD TO LIST REMOVE Figure 3-154 Select Search Criterias 2.) Select the correct tag from the Select Tag pull-down menu. 3.) If needed, type in the value.
Page 209
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-7-6-3 Query/Retrieve Verification SMILEY VERIFICATION CHECK BOX Figure 3-155 DICOM Query/Retrieve Properties Follow the Steps Below to do a First Test (Ping) of the Connection 1.) Select the Smiley button to Ping the server.
Page 210
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL QUERYRETRIEVE CHECK Figure 3-156 Check the DICOM Query/Retrieve Workflow 1.) Select QueryRetrieve from the Selected devices list. 2.) Select Check. If the test passes, a pop-up dialog is displayed, see left illustration in Figure 3-157.
Page 211
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Select OK to continue. A red “X” to the left of the Selected devices indicates that the test failed. Figure 3-158 Test (Check) Failed Chapter 3 — System Setup 3-135…
Page 212
3-7-7-1 Introduction The procedures below describe how to set up the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound scanner for MPEGVue export. This provides the user with the ability to export an entire patient exam into standard supported media (such as, CD, DVD, or USB Memory Stick [disk-on-key]) in standard MPEG or JPG format.
Page 213
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4) From the drop-down menu, select Misc Export — see Figure 3-159. Figure 3-159 Dataflow — Misc Export 5) From selected output devices, highlight evue and then click the Properties button — refer to Figure 3-160 on page 3-138.
Page 214
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 3-160 eVue Properties The eVue Properties Dialog box opens: Figure 3-161 eVue Properties Dialog Box 6) In the Remote Path field, type in the path to which you want to export MPEGVue (when this feature is used).
Page 215
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Note: Step 7 is recommended for the first transfer of MPEGVue files. This step is not needed for Windows XP nor for Windows Vista. After initial transfer of MPEGVue, it is recommended to disable this check box.
Page 216
9.) If required, click OK then select any additional Patient Files for export. 10.)When export complete, click OK then remove the media containing the exported MPEGVue data from the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system. Note: If any problems occurred with copying the Patient Files during the export process, an error message such as the one below will be displayed, showing the status of each of the transferred Patient Files.
Page 217
Introduction It is possible to configure the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound scanner to allow the user to send images or loops to a remote PC, in almost real time. When pressing Store, the loop will save not only to the local archive (in raw-data format), but will also be transmitted to a designated PC (“e-Vue PC”)
Page 218
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 3-163 Connectivity — Dataflow Tab Selected 6.) Click on the Name field to access the drop-down menu. 7.) From drop-down menu, select the Dataflow named Local Archive – Int. HD/eVue. 8.) Trackball to the Selected devices window and select (highlight) eVue (see Figure 3-163).
Page 219
This step is not needed for Windows XP. After initial transfer of eVue, it is recommended to disable this check box. The Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N dataflow is set and ready for export/import of eVue files into a network computer.
Page 220
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL The Search/Create Patient dialog box opens. Figure 3-165 Search/Create Patient Dialog Box 2.) Type the patient’s Last Name and ID in the appropriate fields (see Figure 3-165).
Page 221
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-7-9 Using MPEGVue/eVue on a Remote PC NOTE: MPEGVue Player is intended for secondary review and patient consultation. 3-7-9-1 Installing MPEGVue on a Remote PC NOTE: MPGEGVue player is not compatible with Windows 98.
Page 222
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 3-167 Download/Installation Message Examples #2 3-7-9-1-1 Manually Setting the Network PC for eVue Import 1) On the network computer, create a New User by accessing the Control Panel, as follows: a.) Double-click on My Computer icon on desktop.
Page 223
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL The User Accounts dialog box opens: Figure 3-168 User Accounts Dialog Box 3) Select the Advanced Tab. 4) Click on the Advanced button. The Local Users and Groups dialog box opens: Figure 3-169 Local Users and Groups Dialog Box 5.) Select the Users folder and right-click to select New User.
Page 224
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL The New User dialog box opens: Figure 3-170 New User Dialog Box 6.) Configure a new user account, as follows (see Figure 3-170): a.) User name:…
Page 225
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL b.) Now select New and Folder, to create a new folder: Important: When more than one scanner is used to export with eVue, it is recommended to configure each scanner with its own folder for exporting files.
Page 226
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 3-171 eVue_Import Properties Dialog Box b.) Select the Sharing Tab. c.) Click on the Permissions button. The Permissions for eVue Import dialog box opens: Note: It is recommended to remove this user.
Page 227
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL d.) Click the Add button. Note: It is recommended to remove the User Everyone from Share Permissions. The Select Users, Computers, or Groups dialog box opens: Figure 3-173 Select Users, Computers, or Groups Dialog Box e.) Click the Object Types button.
Page 228
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 3-174 Select Users or Groups Dialog Box — Check Names j.) Click the Check Names button. The name and path will be detected by underlining, as shown below. k.) Now click OK.
Page 229
Close all windows. Note: The network computer is now ready to receive files from the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system. At this stage, set the appropriate path for export of files into the network computer. For example, for eVue, Data Flow or MpegVue export into the network computer using the browsing option to select the appropriate path.
Page 230
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL c.) Select Control Panel from the Menu. 2.) Double-click on Network Connections as shown above. 3.) Select your network connection and right-click. 4.) From the drop-down menu, select Properties.
Page 231
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box opens: Figure 3-176 Local Area Connection Properties Dialog Box 5.) Select the Advanced Tab. 6.) Uncheck the Internet Connection Firewall check box, as shown in Figure 3-176.
Page 232
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 2.) Double-click on Administrative Tools. The Administrative Tools dialog box opens: Figure 3-177 Administrative Tools Dialog Box 3.) Double-click on Services. 4.) From the Services dialog box, select your firewall program (for example, Black Ice).
Page 233
ANUAL 6.) When finished, click Close. 7.) Now you can try to reconnect the network computer to the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system. Stopping the Firewall on Windows XP Service Pack 2 1.) On the network computer, access the Control Panel, as follows: a.) Press Start.
Page 234
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-7-9-2 Un-installing MPEGVue on a Remote PC 1.) Log in to Windows with Administrator permissions. Note: You may need to obtain these from the local IT person. 2.) Close all Internet Explorer windows, if open.
Page 235
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 3-181 Uninstall Message 1 Figure 3-182 Uninstall Message 2 d.) From the C:Program FilesGEULSeStorePlayerVersion1_0 folder, delete all files, as shown in Figure 3-183 on page 3-160.
Page 236
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 3-183 Deleting All Files 5.) Restart Windows, then confirm that the MPEGVue application is no longer installed. 3-160 Section 3-4 — Preparing for Installation…
Page 237
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-7-9-3 Using MPEGVue Viewer on a Remote PC 3-7-9-3-1 Reading an MPEGVue Exam An MPEG exam can be read on any computer with Windows 2000/XP/Vista, provided that DirectX 8.1 (or later) and Windows Media Player 7.1 (or later) are installed.
Page 238
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 1) Click on the required examination Exam Date (labeled 1 in the example above) to select and display images of that exam. The MPEGVue screen is displayed as shown in the example in Figure 3-185 below.
Page 239
2) Perform the measurement. Note: If the original image contains measurements that were taken and stored on the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N scanner, those measurements will appear in the MPEGvue image. In this case, additional measurements cannot be performed on that image.
Page 240
Saved Worksheets On the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N scanner, it is possible to view the Worksheet and press Store. This will generate a still frame showing a snapshot of the Worksheet with the visible measurements on it. This same snapshot will also be visible in the MPEGvue Viewer.
Page 241
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 3-186 E-mail Dialog Box — Sending Current Exam 3.) Click Next. The E-mail address window is displayed (Figure 3-187 below).
Page 242
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Note: The password should be given to the recipient of the e-mail verbally by phone or by other protected means. (It is recommended to keep a separate record of passwords used).
Page 243
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL The E-mail Dialog box is displayed. Figure 3-191 E-mail Dialog Box 2) Activate the Send Current Image radio button, then click Next. Note: If it is necessary to send the MPEGVue Player software to the recipient, first complete this procedure, then proceed to…
Page 244
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL When the operation is complete, a Confirmation window is displayed as shown below.. Figure 3-194 Operation Completed Message 5) Click OK to close the message window. 6) Check that the message has been sent from the Outlook Outbox.
Page 245
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Note: When the message has been sent from the Outbox and has arrived at the addressee, the recipient should follow the instructions (included in the body of the email) in order to install the MPEGVue Player.
Page 246
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 1) From the desktop, double-click on the MPEGVue Startup icon. The MPEGVue Startup Menu opens: Provides access to Outlook Inbox Opens Patient List (lists only studies received by email) Activates e-Vue — opens Patient List of studies received via export operation Enables user to manage patient exams received by email, export or removable…
Page 247
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3-7-9-3-12 Get New Exams by E-mail 1) From the MPEGVue Startup Menu, click on the Get new exams by email button. The Start MPEGVue screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-198 below.
Page 248
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL The following message is displayed while the e-mail Inbox is being scanned for studies: When complete, all studies found in the Inbox are listed in the Found Studies dialog box, as shown Figure 3-199 below.
Page 249
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL The Password window is displayed:. Figure 3-200 Password Window 6) Enter the same password (for decryption of the study) as that used by the sender of the e-mails. Note: The Password is case-sensitive.
Page 250
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Click OK to close the message. The exam is now listed in the MPEGVue Patient List (see Figure 3-202 below) and is ready for selection and viewing.
Page 251
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Activate e-Vue 1) From the MPEGVue Startup Menu, click on the Activate e-Vue button. The Patient List is displayed, listing all e-Vue exams received (refer to Figure 3-203, above).
Page 252
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL c.) The current path information is displayed below the Patient List as well as number of studies, cumulative size and amount of space available on the drive. By default, the destination path Other Folder radio button is enabled.
Page 253
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Note: When the selected studies have been copied to the destination folder, they will remain listed in the MPEGVue Patient Manager Patient List. However, if they have been moved, they will no longer be listed.
Page 254
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4.) Manage Other Exams, as follows: a.) Make sure the Manage Other Exams tab is activated as shown in Figure 3-207.
Page 255
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 3-208 Exams Selected for Copying g.) Click the Copy Selected Patients button. h.) During the copy operation, the following message and progress bar is displayed: i.) When done, the currently-selected exam/s are available in the destination folder for review.
Page 256
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5.) If required, access the System Configuration utility, as follows: a.) Make sure the System Configuration tab is activated as shown in Figure 3-209.
Page 257
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL f.) Select the required eVue folder destination drive: g.) If applicable, enable the peer-to-peer connection check box then type the correct current IP address and Subnet mask details: h.) Click Save to save the new configuration.
Page 258
Disable eVue operations. In cases of a peer-to-peer connection, before using Enable eVue always make sure the two computers (Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 Nscanner and your PC) are properly configured and connected directly. Before using Disable eVue, your PC should be connected back to the local network.
Page 259
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3.) Double-click on the START_MpegVue Player icon, as shown below: Note: On most computers, when inserting the CD media with MpegVue files, the MpegVue Player will start automatically (due to the autoplay option of CD-ROM).
Page 260
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 3-211 Image Review Window 5.) From thumbnails mini-pictures (on the left of the screen), select one for review. The selected image is displayed in the Image Review window.
Page 261
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Note: The MpegVue Player can be used as a regular player, using the Play, Stop, Forward, and Rewind buttons. In addition, the user can forward images by e-mail, save images, and perform measurements, as previously described.
Page 262
Section 3-8 Storing and Transporting the Unit The Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit weighs up to 65 kg (99 labs), depending on the configuration. To avoid equipment damage and ensure maximum safety while transporting or moving the unit, the following precautions are recommended: •…
Page 263
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL      Figure 3-213 Examples of Cables Not Properly Secured — Diagram 1   Figure 3-214 Securing AC Power Cable Chapter 3 — System Setup 3-187…
Page 264
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL    Figure 3-215 Securing Ultrasound Gel Bottle           …
Page 265
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL         Figure 3-217 Moving the Ultrasound Unit Safely Chapter 3 — System Setup 3-189…
Page 266
EVISION ERVICE ANUAL              Document no. R2424026-100 Rev.3 GE Healthcare-Ultrasound Figure 3-218 Correct and Incorrect Positioning — Diagram 2 3-190 Section 3-8 — Storing and Transporting the Unit…
Page 267
Verify that the required packing materials are available. All these materials are required to safely package and transport the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit in the cardboard shipping carton for shipment by vehicle, or any other means.
Page 268
Section 3-9 Completing the Installation Paperwork NOTE: On completion of a Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound scanner installation, it is important to record the relevant System Installation details (see Table 3-7 below) and Product Locator Installation details (see Figure 3-219 on page 3-193), for future reference.
Page 269
3-9-4 User Manual(s) Check that the correct Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N User Manual(s) for the system (and relevant software revision), is included with the installation. Specific language versions of the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N User Manual may also be available.
Page 270
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL This page was intentionally left blank. 3-194 Section 3-9 — Completing the Installation Paperwork…
Page 271
Purpose of Chapter 4 This chapter describes the functional checks that must be performed either as a part of the installation procedure, or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance of the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound scanner.
Page 272
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot-up 4-2-2-1 Connecting Mains Power to the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N Ultrasound Unit To avoid the risk of fire, power to the system must be supplied from a properly DANGER rated outlet. It is recommended to use a dedicated power outlet. The power plug should not, under any circumstances, be altered to a configuration rated less than that specified for the current.
Page 273
Follow These Steps to Connect Mains Power to the Unit Connecting the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit involves preliminary checks of the power cord, voltage level and compliance with electrical safety requirements.
Page 274
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-2-2 Power ON/Boot-up (cont’d) NOTE: In the next step, it is necessary to screw the plastic cable clamp (into the hole provided in the support column — centrally located at the rear of the system, see Figure 4-2 «Plastic Cable Clamp and Securing Screw»…
Page 275
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-2-2 Power ON/Boot-up (cont’d) 4-2-2-2 Turning the System ON 1) Verify that the ultrasound unit has been connected to the mains power wall outlet via the AC connector on the rear of the system (as previously described) and that mains power is turned ON.
Page 276
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-2-2 Power ON/Boot-up (cont’d) c.) The Back-End Processor and the rest of the scanner commences the following sequence (in the listed order of steps): 1.) Back-End Processor is turned ON and starts to load the software.
Page 277
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-2-3 Power Shut Down When switching the unit OFF, the system performs an automatic shutdown sequence. NOTE: After turning OFF the system, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot-up if power is recycled too quickly.
Page 278
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-2-3 Power Shut Down (cont’d) 4-2-3-1 Standby Mode Follow the steps below to select Standby Mode This procedure describes the steps required to power down the unit to Standby mode: NOTE: Don’t press the On/Off button too long.
Page 279
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-2-3 Power Shut Down (cont’d) 4-2-3-2 Complete Power Down NOTE: This function is not available from Standby mode. Follow this procedure to perform a complete system power-down 1.) Hold down the On/Off button for 3-5 seconds to evoke the display of the System Exit dialog box (see Figure 4-7 «System Exit Dialog Box»…
Page 280
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-2-4 Log On to the System as ADM Table 4-2 Logging on to the System as ADM Step Task Expected Result(s) Press Config on the alphanumeric keyboard.
Page 281
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 4-2 Logging on to the System as ADM (cont’d) Step Task Expected Result(s) Select System to access the System Setup window. The System Settings window is displayed Proceed to select the required settings.
Page 282
This connection must be via a USB-to-SCSI adaptor; one side of the adaptor being connected to the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N USB port, and the other side to the rear of the MOD drive. When connecting the MOD drive directly to the system, it is necessary to use an additional power source.
Page 283
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-2-5 Using Removable Media (cont’d) Figure 4-8 Eject Device Menu 2.) Select 5 1/4 MO Disk in the Eject Device menu to eject the MO Disk. 3.) Remove the ejected MO Disk from the MO Drive and place it in its cover box for storage in a safe place.
Page 284
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-2-6 Labeling Removable Media Before you start to format any Removable Media, be sure about what naming convention you will use for labelling.
Page 285
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-2-8 DICOM Repair of Removable Media 1.) Insert the removable media to be verified. 2.) Select the pre-configured removable media from the Config > Connectivity > Tools pop-up menu. 3.) Press Repair DICOM Dir.
Page 286
STEP TASK FUNCTION Insert an empty, formatted MO disk labelled “PRESETS” and marked with Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N serial number and the date, into the MO Drive. For more information about formatting, see ‘Formatting Removable Media” on page 4-14.
Page 287
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-2-9-2 Restoring System Configuration from an MO Disk Table 4-4 Restoring System Configuration STEP TASK FUNCTION Insert the MO disk with the archived presets into the MOD.
Page 288
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 4-3 Functional Checks 4-3-1 Basic Controls 4-3-1-1 Alphanumeric Keyboard Test Table 4-5 Alphanumeric Keyboard Test Step Task Expected Result(s) Power-up the System in Normal Scanning Mode Press Config and select Report Select the Comment Texts Tab and press New.
Page 289
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 4-6 Extended Keyboard and Trackball Test Step Task Expected Result(s) Power-up the System in Normal Scanning Mode Press <Alt> F2 to start the diagnostic package. Highlight the Extended Keyboard Test and press <Set>…
Page 290
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 4-6 Extended Keyboard and Trackball Test (cont’d) Step Task Expected Result(s) Check the On/Off button: The On/Off button displayed in the Test Screen will be a.) Press the button once;…
Page 291
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-3-1-3 System SN Test Table 4-7 System SN Test Step Task Expected Result(s) Boot-up the System in Regular Scanning Mode Press Config Under the Connectivity tab, select TCPIP then Computer Name…
Page 292
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-3-1-5 Light Detector Test for Vivid S6 N only Table 4-9 Light Detector Test Step Task Expected Result(s) Boot-up the System in Regular Scanning Mode. Press LCD (F4 Key) to start the LCD adjustment.
Page 293
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 4-10 Monitor Test (cont’d) Step Task Expected Result(s) Select Solid Test. Not more than 1 missing pixel in R/G/B tests Make sure there are no more than 1 missing pixel in the Full Select Red Screen Red or display in another color.
Page 294
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 4-11 ECG Test (cont’d) Step Task Expected Result(s) The ECG signal is displayed in the Data area, as shown in the example below: From the Test ECG device window, set the resolution to 1 second and press the Open Device button.
Page 295
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-3-1-8 Front End Tests Table 4-12 Front End Tests Step Task Expected Result(s) In order to access an individual board test, it is necessary to insert the service dongle from system boot-up and enter the Service Password.
Page 296
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 4-12 Front End Tests (cont’d) Step Task Expected Result(s) Disconnect any probes currently connected to the system and make sure that nothing is touching the probe connectors.
Page 297
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 4-12 Front End Tests (cont’d) Step Task Expected Result(s) Trackball to TR32 BF Digital Test and press Set. Disconnect any probes currently connected to the system and make sure that nothing is touching the probe connectors.
Page 298
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 4-12 Front End Tests (cont’d) Step Task Expected Result(s) Adjacent to On Fail, select either Stop or Continue, as required.
Page 299
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 4-12 Front End Tests (cont’d) Step Task Expected Result(s) The test commences. When the ACW IQ Symmetry Test sequence is complete, the View Test Log window opens Trackball to the Start button and press Set automatically, listing the test performed and showing…
Page 300
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 4-12 Front End Tests (cont’d) Step Task Expected Result(s) ACW Delay Range Test Trackball to ACW Delay Range Test and press Set. Disconnect any probes currently connected to the system and make sure that nothing is touching the probe connectors.
Page 301
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 4-12 Front End Tests (cont’d) Step Task Expected Result(s) Under the Special Instructions area, activate the Loops checkbox and select the required number of Loops from the combo box.
Page 302
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 4-12 Front End Tests (cont’d) Step Task Expected Result(s) The test commences. When the PENCIL RX Test sequence is complete, the Trackball to the Start button and press Set View Test Log window opens automatically, listing the test performed and showing whether it passed or failed…
Page 303
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-3-2 Peripherals 4-3-2-1 B/W and Color Printer Test NOTE: If the printer is not currently connected to the system, refer to ‘Sony UP-D897 B/W Video Printer”…
Page 304
Figure 8-278 on page 8-244. indicators. Create a dummy patient file on the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N scanner. Save several images in the patient file. Export the images to the External USB Hard Disk. Delete the dummy patient file (including images) from The deleted patient file and images are no longer listed.
Page 305
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-3-3 Mechanical Functional Tests 4-3-3-1 Arm Movement Test Table 4-17 Arm Movement Test Step Task Expected Result(s) Lift the up/down release handle upwards. (It is located The up and down movement locking mechanism is on the right side below the operator panel).
Page 306
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-3-3-3 Monitor Movement Test Table 4-19 Main Shelf Movement Test Step Task Expected Result(s) Ensure that you do apply some force to move the monitor.
Page 307
The red LED on the service dongle illuminates. ports in turn, checking that the LED illuminates correctly. 4-3-4-2 Standby Test NOTE: This test only applicable for Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N systems with a battery. Table 4-23 Standby Test Task Expected Result(s) Press the On/Off button on the control console for no The system enters Standby mode.
Page 308
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 4-4 Image Testing This section provides guidelines for the following image testing checks: 2D Mode (B Mode) Checks — see below ‘M Mode Checks”…
Page 309
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-4-1-3 Adjust the 2D Mode Controls ALWAYS USE THE MINIMUM POWER REQUIRED TO OBTAIN ACCEPTABLE IMAGES WARNING WARNING IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE GUIDELINES AND POLICIES. 1.) Press 2D on the Operator Panel to access 2D mode.
Page 310
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-4-2-1 Preparations 1.) Connect one of the probes. ‘Connecting Probes” on page 3-71 for information about connecting the probes. 2.) Turn ON the scanner.
Page 311
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL NOTE: The scale value may affect FPS, Low Velocity Reject, and Sample Volume. • Adjust Low Velocity Reject to remove low velocity blood flow and tissue movement that reduces image quality.
Page 312
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL • Adjust Power to obtain an acceptable image using the lowest setting possible. NOTE: The Power setting affects all other operating modes. Adjust the following settings to further optimize display of the image: •…
Page 313
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL • Adjust Frame rate to a higher setting to improve motion detection, or to a lower setting to improve resolution.
Page 314
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4-4-6 Probe/Connectors Check TAKE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS WITH THE PROBE CABLES: CAUTION — KEEP AWAY FROM THE WHEELS — DO NOT BEND — DO NOT CROSS CABLES BETWEEN PROBES Table 4-24 Probe and Connectors Checks…
Page 315
Section 4-5 System Turnover Checklist Before returning the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound scanner to regular operational use, the System Configuration settings should be checked. In 2D-Mode, press Config on the keyboard and check the settings in accordance with those listed or referenced in Table 4-25 «Software Configuration Checklist»…
Page 316
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 4-6 Site Log Table 4-1: Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N Site Log Date Service Person Problem Comments 4-46 Section 4-6 — Site Log…
Page 317
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 4-1: Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N Site Log (cont’d) Date Service Person Problem Comments Chapter 4 — Functional Checks 4-47…
Page 318
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL This page was intentionally left blank. 4-48 Section 4-6 — Site Log…
Page 319
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Chapter 5 Components and Function (Theory) Section 5-1 Overview 5-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 5 This chapter explains Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N system concepts, component arrangement, and sub-system functions.
Page 320
Open connectivity using multiple USB ports • High-performance LCD monitor, with fully-adjustable contrast and viewing angle (Vivid S6 N systems: 17″ display; Vivid S5 N systems: 15″ display) • Low profile, backlit keyboard Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N have a digital beam forming system (incorporated in the Front End) that can handle up to 192 element linear probes using multiplexing.
Page 321
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-2-2 Signal Flow The two TR32 Boards in the Front-End Processor generate the strong bursts transmitted by the probes as ultrasound into the body.
Page 322
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-2-3 Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N Systems — Block Diagram Figure 5-2 System Block Diagram…
Page 323
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 5-3 Front End Unit 5-3-1 General Information The Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N Front End system (see diagram in Figure 5-4 «Front End — Block Diagram»…
Page 324
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 5-3 Front End Unit (cont’d) Figure 5-3 System Block Diagram showing Location of Front End Section 5-3 — Front End Unit…
Page 325
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 5-3 Front End Unit (cont’d) Figure 5-4 Front End — Block Diagram Chapter 5 — Components and Function (Theory)
Page 326
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-3-2 Front End Unit — Location in the System The Front End unit is located inside the cabinet cage assembly — see Figure 5-5 «Cabinet Cage Assembly»…
Page 327
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-3-2 Front End Unit — Location in the System (cont’d) ECG Cable PIB-PSB Flex RFI_AM Board TR32 Boards (located below the PIB) Figure 5-7 Cabinet Cage Assembly showing Position of Boards (PSB, PIB, RFI_AM and TR3) Chapter 5 — Components and Function (Theory)
Page 328
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-3-3 RFI_AM Board The RFI_AM Board combines the following functionalities: • Front End Control • Radio Frequency & Tissue Processing •…
Page 329
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-3-3 RFI_AM Board (cont’d) 5-3-3-4 FPGA Download The FPGAs contain no configuration upon power-ON; FGPA Download proceeds as follows: 1.) The actual FPGA contents (bit-streams) are written into DSP memory from the Host.
Page 330
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-3-3 RFI_AM Board (cont’d) 5-3-3-6 RFI_AM Board Connectors P5 to PIB P7 to PIB P14 to Power Supply PCI Flex to RFI J1 to TR32 Boards J2 to TR32 Boards Figure 5-9 RFI_AM Board Connector Locations…
Page 331
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-3-3 RFI_AM Board (cont’d) Table 5-3 RFI_AM Board — Input DC Voltages Input Description Connector — PIN# Connected From +3.3 V DC voltage from PS P14 1-4…
Page 332
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-3-4 TR32 Boards (Transmitter/Receiver) 5-3-4-1 General Description The TR32 has 64 receive channels and is made up of two identical TR32 Boards: TR32A and TR32B (see Figure 5-10).
Page 333
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-3-4 TR32 Boards (Transmitter/Receiver) (cont’d) Figure 5-12 Connectors on TR32 Board — Bottom View Table 5-4 TR32 Board Connectors Connector # Description To RFI Board…
Page 334
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-3-4 TR32 Boards (Transmitter/Receiver) (cont’d) Each TR32 Board has 32 channels and includes a 32-channel Digital Beam Former (consisting of one FOC32 ASIC).
Page 335
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-3-5 Probe Select Board (PSB) The Probe Select Board (PSB) enables acquisition and processing of signals from and to probes connected to the front panel.
Page 336
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-3-5 Probe Select Board (PSB) (cont’d) To PIB via Flex Connector Figure 5-16 Probe Select Board — Bottom View Table 5-6 PSB Connectors Connector # Description…
Page 337
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-3-6 Probe Interface Board (PIB) The Probe Interface Board (PIB) interconnects the following boards: • Interface between the RFI_AM and PSB •…
Page 338
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-3-6 Probe Interface Board (PIB) (cont’d) Figure 5-18 Probe Interface Board — Connectors Table 5-8 PIB Connectors Connector # Description To PSB via Flex Not used…
Page 339
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-3-6 Probe Interface Board (PIB) (cont’d) Table 5-9 PIB Input DC Voltages Input Description Connector — PIN# Connected From 12 V DC voltage, distributed via RFI Board J5 -16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21…
Page 340
Back End Processor 5-4-1 Introduction The Back End Processor (BEP) supports the operation of the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit and is the main controller for the system. A block diagram of the BEP is provided in Figure 5-20 «Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N Back End Processor -…
Page 341
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 5-4 Back End Processor (cont’d) Figure 5-20 Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N Back End Processor — Block Diagram Chapter 5 — Components and Function (Theory) 5-23…
Page 342
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 5-4 Back End Processor (cont’d) For reference, a list of abbreviations used in this section is provided in Table 5-10 «Abbreviations and Definitions»…
Page 343
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-4-3 ETX Base Board 5-4-3-1 Overview of ETX Base Board Functions The ETX Base Board connects all the peripheral modules to the ETX single board computer. The CPU (see 5-4-2 «ETX SBC Central Processing Unit (CPU)»…
Page 344
Hard Disk The Hard Disk is the main storage device of the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit. The Hard Disk, which is controlled by the CPU via signals from the IDE Bus, is partitioned into four drives, each of which is designated for different operations, as follows: •…
Page 345
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-4-4 Hard Disk (cont’d) • E: Drive: Archiving of all images and reports. The partition size is normally 35 GB but this depends upon the size of the hard disk.
Page 346
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-4-8 Back End Processor — Location of Components From DC-DC Power Supply To Fan Board PCI Cable to RFI ETX SBC CPU Internal Battery Control, Status, and Power…
Page 347
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-4-8 Back End Processor — Location of Components (cont’d) 5-4-8-1 BEP Connectors Figure 5-24 Connectors on the BEP Table 5-11 BEP Connectors Connector # Description EXT DC INPUT…
Page 348
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-4-8 Back End Processor — Location of Components (cont’d) Table 5-12 BEP Input DC Voltages Input Description Connector — PIN# Connected From EXT_DC 20 V DC from PS…
Page 349
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 5-5 Internal and External Input/Output (I/O) The Distribution Interface Board (DIB) connects between the different system sections and also provides the following functionality: •…
Page 350
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 5-5 Internal and External Input/Output (I/O) (cont’d) 2 x Isolated AC Outlets LAN RJ45 2 x USB Circuit Breaker (for connection of peripherals prior to regular system use)
Page 351
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 5-5 Internal and External Input/Output (I/O) (cont’d) The DIB has the following internal interfaces: • Two PS/2 channels for A/N K/B and Trackball. •…
Page 352
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-5-1 DIB — Interconnections Controller Burning Connector J4 — Network RJ45 J16 2x USB USB Connectors (see below) J12 Audio J7 — Power from AC Box J17 — DVI + VGA to Extension Monitor…
Page 353
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-5-1 DIB — Interconnections (cont’d) J22 USB from BEP J2 — BEP — DIB Cable Connector J21 — LAN from BEP Figure 5-28 DIB — Bottom View Table 5-13 DIB Connectors Connector #…
Page 354
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-5-1 DIB — Interconnections (cont’d) Table 5-14 DIB- Input DC Voltages Input Description Connector — PIN# Connected To/ From 5 V_BE DC voltage distributed via BEP J2-1, 3, 26, 56…
Page 355
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 5-15 DIB Power Connector — J7 Pin Number Pinout 5V DC 5V DC 12V DC 20V DC Not in use Not in use Not in use PWR CONT…
Page 356
• DC/DC Power Supply Unit — located inside the cabinet cage assembly, provides the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system with both Low Voltage and High Voltage power, and also enables recharging of the battery.
Page 357
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-6-3 AC Distribution Panel The distribution of isolated local AC power is allocated in the peripherals section, and divided as follows: •…
Page 358
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-6-3 AC Distribution Panel (cont’d) Table 5-18 AC Distribution Box — J6 Connector Pin Number Pinout 5V DC 5V DC 12V DC 12V DC 20V DC…
Page 359
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL System Ground Equalization CB1 System Circuit Isolated AC Breakers Output AC Input to Isolated DC System Output Side View 110 V or 220 VAC Power Jumper…
Page 360
ERVICE ANUAL 5-6-4 Power Supply Unit Components As shown in Figure 5-33 «Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N Power Supply Unit Components — Block Diagram» on page 5-42, the Power Supply Unit comprises the following components: • Rechargeable Battery •…
Page 361
NOTE: The battery is designed to be replaced every 2 years. The battery is designed to work with Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N systems only. Only use the CAUTION batteries authorized by GE.
Page 362
Do not use a damaged battery. Do not solder a battery. Do not connect the battery to an electrical outlet. If the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N portable ultrasound system is not being used for periods of one CAUTION month or longer, the battery should be removed during lengthy non-use period.
Page 363
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 5-7 Top Console with Monitor and Operator Panel 5-7-1 Keyboard and Operator Panel Figure 5-35 «Keyboard and Operator Panel Layout» on page 5-45 illustrates the layout of the Vivid™…
Page 364
The Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N alphanumeric keyboard, with a key arrangement similar to that of a laptop keyboard, is based on the global GE International standard keyboard requirements. The alphanumeric keyboard has a PS/2 interface and supports all standard alpha-numeric functionality, such as, auto-repeat, standard ASCII output codes, etc.
Page 365
5-7-2-6 Trackball The Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N operator panel has a 1.5” trackball centrally located above the hand-rest area to provide easy operation. The trackball has a PS/2 interface and supports a variety of basic PC operations and specific ultrasound controls.
Page 366
5-7-2-10 Keyboard ID The keyboard PCB contains an EEPROM which stores a variety of information about the keyboard such as, GE part number, manufacturing date, and revision # of the PCB hardware. The EEPROM size is 1KB. 5-7-2-11 Keyboard Connectors USB Input Control &…
Page 367
5-7-2-13 Display Unit The display monitor is a 15″ (Vivid S5 N) or 17″ inch (Vivid S6 N) LCD. In order to optimize the display settings, a light-sensing device located on the keyboard is used for measuring the ambient light. This data is processed by the main CPU which adapts the display setting, accordingly.
Page 368
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 5-8 ECG Module 5-8-1 Overview The Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N ECG Patient I/O module is designed to enable acquisition of the following signals: ECG, and external ECG.
Page 369
The ECG Bandwidth is 0.05 to 150Hz. 5-8-3 Isolation The ECG signals are isolated from the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system to comply with IEC601-1 type CF device classification. All leakage and auxiliary currents apply the values listed in Table 5-20 «Leakage and Auxiliary Current Values»…
Page 370
Black & White Digital Printer The B&W Digital Printer receives image data and the print command via the USB port which is controlled by the keys Print or Alt+Print on the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N operator panel. Digital…
Page 371
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5-9-1 Introduction (cont’d) 5-9-1-4 Wireless Network Adapter The Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N supports a unique type of Wireless Network Adapter. For details regarding type and installation, refer to “Wireless Network Adaptor”…
Page 372
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 5-10 Cooling System 5-10-1 General Information The Vivid 5S N/6S N cooling system comprises two main parts: • A single, 80×80 mm freely-running FAN located on the left side of the AC Distribution Box.
Page 373
5-11-1 Introduction The Service Platform contains a set of software modules that are common to many of GE’s ultrasound and cardiology systems. This Web-enabled technology provides linkage to e-Services, e-Commerce, and the iCenter, making GE’s scanners more e-enabled than ever.
Page 374
Use the OnLine Center. External Service Access is protected with a password. GE Service Requires knowledge of a password. Every access request, whether successful or not, will be logged into a service access log that is viewable to authorized users.
Page 375
Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system monitor, then manually adjust the External Monitor (using its own controls), as required. Overall low image quality or “shades” visible on the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N LCD Display may be the result of improper monitor calibration. Therefore, adjustments may be made to the Brightness, Contrast and/or Blue Tint, as required.
Page 376
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6-1-2 LCD Display Adjustments and Calibration (cont’d) Figure 6-1 LCD Display Calibration Screen 6-1-2-1 Contrast Adjustment Procedure • To adjust the Contrast: Rotate the second rotary knob from left on the soft menus keys, as required.
Page 377
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6-1-2-2 Brightness Adjustment Procedure • To adjust the Brightness: Rotate the left-most rotary knob on the soft menus keys, as required. Counter-clockwise rotation will decrease the brightness Clockwise rotation will increase the brightness.
Page 378
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6-1-2-4 Blue Tint Adjustment Procedure • To adjust the Blue Tint: Rotate the second right rotary knob on the soft menus keys, as required. Counterclockwise rotation will decrease the blue tint level.
Page 379
Systems with BT11 installed software have a Blue Tint “2” option that enables blue tint enhancement. This option can be switched off if preferred by the user. NOTE: This option applies to the following LCD monitor installations: System: Vivid S5 N Monitor: NEC 15-2 System: Vivid S6 N…
Page 380
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6-1-2-5-1 Adjusting the Blue Tint 1.) On the console, press the LCD button and then point the cursor to the Test Pattern soft-key on the screen (Figure 6-7) and click to display the test pattern — see…
Page 381
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6-1-2-5-2 Turning Off the Blue Tint “2” Option 1.) Press Config > Service. The Service Screen opens — see Figure 6-9.
Page 382
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6-1-2-7 Display Type Setup The display type should be set each time one of the following procedures is performed: •…
Page 383
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6-1-3 Keyboard Adjustments 6-1-3-1 Backlighting Intensity Adjustment Procedure To make adjustments to the Keyboard Backlighting intensity, follow the procedure described in 3-6-2-3 «Adjust Keyboard Backlight Intensity»…
Page 384
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL This page was intentionally left blank. 6-10…
Page 385
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting Section 7-1 Overview 7-1-1 Purpose of Chapter This chapter describes how to set up and run diagnostic tools to locate system problems and failures. The Vivid™…
Page 386
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 7-2 Diagnostics 7-2-1 Diagnostic Tools The diagnostic tools are provided for checking the system which includes the power supply, temperature, fan operation, board functions, Back-end signal processing performance, keyboard operation, peripherals, and so on.
Page 387
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-2-3 Accessing the Diagnostic Test Window The diagnostic tools are accessed from 2D-Mode by simultaneously pressing <ALT+Config> on the alphanumeric keyboard.
Page 388
You are able to select and perform the • Green: All recommended tests for these components Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N diagnostic tests by have been completed and no problems were trackballing to the required test (listed in identified.
Page 389
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-2-3-1 View Log From the Diagnostics Test Window (Figure 7-1) the View Log button provides access to the test result information described below.This is shown in the View Log dialog box (see example in Figure 7-2 below) which is displayed in the upper right portion of the screen (over the Data Flow Map…
Page 390
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 7-3 Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N Diagnostics Test Window — View Log (cont’d) 2 of 2 Option Description Comments…
Page 391
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 7-2 View Log Dialog Box Figure 7-2 «View Log Dialog Box» on page 7-7 above, the selected report (Test signal amplitude, first harmonic) is displayed in the Report window.
Page 392
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 7-3 ADC Test — Viewing Report (Test Signal Amplitude 2nd Harmonic) NOTE: Left and right arrows provided in the View Report window enable scrolling between the different channels.
Page 393
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL corresponding results are shown in the Report window below, as shown in Figure 7-40. Figure 7-4 View Test Log — ACW Matrix Test — Signal RMS 3.) Use the tools provided to scroll through the channels and view the results, as previously described.
Page 394
Perform calibration, as described in “DC Offset Calibration” on page 7-27 • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified and the results were not marginal, verify that all system cables and…
Page 395
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-2-4 Diagnostic Test Window Menu Options The Diagnostic Test menu includes the options described below. 7-2-4-1 Full System Test NOTE: The Full System Test requires approximately 10 minutes for completion.
Page 396
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-2-4-2 Front End Tests NOTE: The Front End Tests may be performed in any order. However, due to the functional dependencies between each of the Front End boards, it is recommended to perform the tests on the boards in the following order (as described in the Section 7-4 «Performing Front End (FE) Diagnostics»…
Page 397
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-2-4-2-3 TR32 Tests • Beamformer Tests TR32 BF Digital Test This is an internal test of the Beamformers. Each Beamformer generates an internal test pattern (first on the TR32A board and then on the TR32B board).
Page 398
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-2-4-2-4 PIB Tests • ACW Test ACW IQ Symmetry Test The ACW (analog CW test) is performed when CW problems are suspected. Checks the symmetry of I and Q signals.
Page 399
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL • Pencil Test Pencil Rx Test When performing the Pencil Rx Test, no probes or jig are connected to the system. This test is performed to check the receive functions.
Page 400
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-2-4-3-6 Battery Parameters Test The Battery Parameters Test is used to check the battery status with regard to the following: •…
Page 401
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-2-4-4-1 PC Doctor The PC Doctor Tests are divided into two main groups: Automatic and Interactive. The automatic tests do not require user intervention.
Page 402
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL • CPU MMX Shift: Tests the MXX commands PSLL and PSRL. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. •…
Page 403
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL • Video Data Transfer: Tests the graphics acceleration part of the video controller. This test fills the screen with black and white concentric squares, and rectangles of various sizes and colors.
Page 404
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL • Interactive Audio Test The Audio Test is performed to check for proper operation of the audio system; the following selections are available: Left Channel, Right Channel, Both Channels, and MIDI.
Page 405
When performing the automatic Full System Diagnostic tests, it is strongly recommended to start with the Full System Test (FE and BEP) — especially if the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system shows signs of an intermittent problem. As described in this section, the testing sequence can be paused and restarted at any stage, providing a quick and easy method of reviewing any detected faults.
Page 406
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-3-1 Accessing the Full System Diagnostic Options • In 2D-Mode, press <ALT +Config> on the alphanumeric keyboard. The Diagnostic Test window is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-1 «Diagnostic Test Window»…
Page 407
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-3-1 Accessing the Full System Diagnostic Options (cont’d) 3.) Under the Special Instructions area, activate the Loops checkbox and select the required number of Loops from the combo box. 4.) Adjacent to On Fail, select either Stop or Continue, as required.
Page 408
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-3-1 Accessing the Full System Diagnostic Options (cont’d) Figure 7-7 View Test Log — Full System Test (BEP and FE) 7-24 Section 7-3 — Performing Full System Diagnostics…
Page 409
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-3-1 Accessing the Full System Diagnostic Options (cont’d) 8.) If necessary, use the scroll bars and/or arrows to scroll through the list of Test results. 9) After reviewing the test results, proceed as follows: If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted).
Page 410
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 7-4 Performing Front End (FE) Diagnostics NOTE: When performing Front End Diagnostic tests, it is strongly recommended to start with the Full System Test (FE and BEP) especially if the system shows signs of an intermittent problem.
Page 411
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-1 Accessing the Front End Diagnostic Options • In 2D-Mode, press <ALT +Config> on the alphanumeric keyboard. The Diagnostic Test window is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-1.
Page 412
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-2 Calibration Tests (cont’d) 2.) As indicated in the Special Instructions area, disconnect any probes currently connected to the system and make sure that nothing is touching the probe connectors.
Page 413
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified but the results were very close to the upper or lower limits, perform calibration, as described in “DC Offset Calibration”…
Page 414
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 11.)Trackball to the Exit button and press Set to close the View Test Log dialog box. 12.)Press the <Esc> button on the keyboard to close the Diagnostic Test Window. 7-4-2-2 DC Offset Verification NOTE:…
Page 415
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-2-2 DC Offset Verification (cont’d) 5.) Trackball to the Start button and press Set. The CD Offset Verification Test commences. While the test proceeds, the name of the test currently in progress (CD Offset Verification) is displayed in the Execute field and the current Loop # and specific test are shown below.
Page 416
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified but the results were marginal, perform calibration, as described in “DC Offset Calibration”…
Page 417
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-3 Radio Frequency Interface (RFI) Diagnostic Tests 7-4-3-1 Accessing the RFI Diagnostic Test Options • Access the Diagnostic Test window, as described in the 7-4-1 «Accessing the Front End Diagnostic Options»…
Page 418
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-3-2 Full RFI Test (cont’d) 4.) Adjacent to On Fail, select either Stop or Continue, as required. Stopping on failure enables you to review a failed test, the moment it fails.
Page 419
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified but the results were marginal, perform calibration, as described in “DC Offset Calibration”…
Page 420
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-3-3 RFI FE Cache Test (cont’d) Figure 7-14 RFI FE Cache Test 2.) As indicated in the Special Instructions area, disconnect any probes currently connected to the system and make sure that nothing is touching the probe connectors.
Page 421
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified but the results were marginal, perform calibration, as described in “DC Offset Calibration”…
Page 422
If the problem persists, this indicates that either the specific board you tested is faulty or that another board that supports the operation of that board is faulty. Contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. 11.)Trackball to the Exit button and press Set to close the View Test Log dialog box.
Page 423
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-3-4 RFI Analog Circuits Test (cont’d) 3.) Under the Special Instructions area, activate the Loops checkbox and select the required number of Loops from the combo box. 4.) Adjacent to On Fail, select either Stop or Continue, as required.
Page 424
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified but the results were marginal, perform calibration, as described in “DC Offset Calibration”…
Page 425
If the problem persists, this indicates that either the specific board you tested is faulty or that another board that supports the operation of that board is faulty. Contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. 11.)Trackball to the Exit button and press Set to close the View Test Log dialog box.
Page 426
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-3-5 RFI Demodulator Short Test (cont’d) 4.) Adjacent to On Fail, select either Stop or Continue, as required. Stopping on failure enables you to review a failed test, the moment it fails.
Page 427
• If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified but the results were marginal, perform calibration, as described in “DC Offset Calibration”…
Page 428
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-3-6 RFI Audio Test NOTE: For a description of this test, refer to the information provided in • «RFI Audio Test» on page 7-12.
Page 429
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-3-6 RFI Audio Test (cont’d) The RFI Audio Test commences. While the test proceeds, the name of the test currently in progress is displayed in the Execute field and the current Loop # and specific test are shown below.
Page 430
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified but the results were marginal, perform calibration, as described in “DC Offset Calibration”…
Page 431
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-4 TR 32 Diagnostic Tests NOTE: The TR32 Diagnostic Tests are used to perform functional testing of both the TR32A and TR32 boards. 7-4-4-1 Accessing the TR32 Diagnostic Test Options •…
Page 432
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-4 TR 32 Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) 3.) Under the Special Instructions area, activate the Loops checkbox and select the required number of Loops from the combo box. 4.) Adjacent to On Fail, select either Stop or Continue, as required.
Page 433
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified but the results were marginal, perform calibration, as described in “DC Offset Calibration”…
Page 434
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-4 TR 32 Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) 7-4-4-2-2 System BF Digital Test NOTE: For a description of this test, refer to the information in “System BF Digital Test”…
Page 435
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-4 TR 32 Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) The System BF Digital Test commences. While the test proceeds, the name of the test currently in progress (System BF Digital Test) is displayed in the Execute field and the current Loop # and specific test are shown below.
Page 436
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified but the results were marginal, perform calibration, as described in “DC Offset Calibration”…
Page 437
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-4 TR 32 Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) 7-4-4-2-3 ADC Test NOTE: For a description of this test, refer to the information in — «ADC Test»…
Page 438
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-4 TR 32 Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) The ADC Test commences. While the test proceeds, the name of the test currently in progress (ADC Test) is displayed in the Execute field and the current Loop # and specific test are shown below.
Page 439
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-4 TR 32 Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) NOTE: The ADC test has four test reports which are listed in Reports on the right. By default, the First Harmonic report is displayed in the Reports window below (Figure 7-29 «View Test Log — First Harmonic Report»…
Page 440
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-4 TR 32 Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) Figure 7-31 View Test Log — Third Harmonic 13.)Use the tools provided to scroll through the channels and view the results, as previously described. 14) When done, trackball to the Close button and press Set to close the View Report window.
Page 441
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified but the results were marginal, perform calibration, as described in “DC Offset Calibration”…
Page 442
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-4 TR 32 Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) 7-4-4-3 Receive (RX) Tests 7-4-4-3-1 RX Test NOTE: For a description of this test, refer to the information in “RX Test”…
Page 443
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-4 TR 32 Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) 5.) Trackball to the Start button and press Set. The Rx Test commences. While the test proceeds, the name of the test currently in progress (Rx Test) is displayed in the Execute field and the current Loop # and specific test are shown below.
Page 444
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. 7-60 Section 7-4 — Performing Front End (FE) Diagnostics…
Page 445
If the problem persists, this indicates that either the specific board you tested is faulty or that another board that supports the operation of that board is faulty. Contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. 13.)Trackball to the Exit button and press Set to close the View Test Log dialog box.
Page 446
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-5 Probe Interface Board Diagnostic Tests 7-4-5-1 Accessing the Probe Interface Board Diagnostic Test Options • Access the Diagnostic Test window, as described in the 7-4-1 «Accessing the Front End Diagnostic Options»…
Page 447
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests 7-4-6-1 Accessing the Probe Select Board Diagnostic Test Options • Access the Diagnostic Test window, as described in the 7-4-1 «Accessing the Front End Diagnostic Options»…
Page 448
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) 2.) As indicated in the Special Instructions area, disconnect any probes currently connected to the system and make sure that nothing is touching the probe connectors.
Page 449
“DC Offset Calibration” on page 7-27. • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified and the results were not marginal, verify that all system cables and…
Page 450
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) 7-4-6-2-2 ACW Matrix Test NOTE: For a description of this test, refer to the information in — «ACW Matrix Test»…
Page 451
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) The ACW Matrix Test commences. While the test proceeds, the name of the test currently in progress (ACW IQ Symmetry Test) is displayed in the Execute field and the current Loop # and specific test are shown below.
Page 452
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) NOTE: The ACW Matrix Test test has three test reports (Signal Frequency, Signal RMS, and Signal SNR) which are listed in the Reports window on the right.
Page 453
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) Select the second report (Signal RMS); the report is highlighted in the Reports list, and the corresponding results are shown in the Report window below, as shown in Figure 7-40 «View Test Log — ACW Matrix Test — Signal RMS»…
Page 454
Perform calibration, as described in “DC Offset Calibration” on page 7-27 • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified and the results were not marginal, verify that all system cables and…
Page 455
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) 7-4-6-2-3 ACW Delay Range Test NOTE: For a description of this test, refer to the information in “ACW Delay Range Test”…
Page 456
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) 4.) Trackball to the Start button and press Set. The ACW Delay Range Test commences. While the test proceeds, the name of the test currently in progress (ACW IQ Delay Range Test) is displayed in the Execute field and the current Loop # and specific test are shown below.
Page 457
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) NOTE: The ACW Delay Range Test test has three test reports (Signal Frequency, Signal RMS, and Signal SNR) which are listed in the Reports window on the right.
Page 458
7-4-2-1 «DC Offset Calibration» on page 7-27. • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified and the results were not marginal, verify that all system cables and…
Page 459
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) 7-4-6-2-4 ACW Pre-Mixer Gain Test NOTE: For a description of this test, refer to the information in — «ACW Pre-Mixer Gain Test»…
Page 460
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) 4.) Trackball to the Start button and press Set. The ACW Pre-Mixer Gain Test commences. While the test proceeds, the name of the test currently in progress (ACW Pre-Mixer Gain Test) is displayed in the Execute field and the current Loop # and specific test are shown below.
Page 461
7-4-2-1 «DC Offset Calibration» on page 7-27. • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If “Fail” appears in one of the Result columns, the test has failed, even if “Pass” appears in other columns.
Page 462
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6-2-5 ACW BPF Test NOTE: For a description of this test, refer to the information in — «ACW BPF Test» on page 7-14.
Page 463
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4.) Trackball to the Start button and press Set. The ACW BPF Test commences. While the test proceeds, the name of the test currently in progress (ACW BPF Test) is displayed in the Execute field and the current Loop # and specific test are shown below.
Page 464
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) Figure 7-49 View Test Log — ACW BPF Test — BPF0 NOTE: The ACW BPF Test has four test reports (BPF0, BPF1, BPF2, and BPF3) which are listed in the Reports window on the right.
Page 465
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) Figure 7-50 View Test Log — ACW BPF Test — BPF1 9.) Use the tools provided to scroll through the channels and view the results, as previously described. 10) When done, trackball to the Close button and press Set to close the View Report window.
Page 466
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) Figure 7-51 View Test Log — ACW BPF Test — BPF2 12.)Use the tools provided to scroll through the channels and view the results, as previously described. 13) When done, trackball to the Close button and press Set to close the View Report window.
Page 467
“DC Offset Calibration” on page 7-27. • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified and the results were not marginal, verify that all system cables and…
Page 468
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) 7-4-6-2-6 ACW HPF Test NOTE: For a description of this test, refer to the information in “ACW HPF Test”…
Page 469
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) 4.) Trackball to the Start button and press Set. The ACW HPF Test commences. While the test proceeds, the name of the test currently in progress (ACW HPF Test) is displayed in the Execute field and the current Loop # and specific test are shown below.
Page 470
“DC Offset Calibration” on page 7-27. • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified and the results were not marginal, verify that all system cables and…
Page 471
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) 7-4-6-2-7 Pencil Rx Test NOTE: For a description of this test, refer to the information in — «Pencil Rx Test»…
Page 472
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE 7-88 Section 7-4 — Performing Front End (FE) Diagnostics…
Page 473
If the problem persists, this indicates that either the specific board you tested is faulty or that another board that supports the operation of that board is faulty. Contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. 10.)Trackball to the Exit button and press Set to close the View Test Log dialog box.
Page 474
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 7-5 Monitoring Tests 7-5-1 Accessing the Monitoring Diagnostic Test Options • Access the Diagnostic Test window, as described in the 7-4-1 «Accessing the Front End Diagnostic Options»…
Page 475
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-4-6 Probe Select Board Diagnostic Tests (cont’d) The Full System Monitoring Test commences. While the test proceeds, the name of the test currently in progress (ADC Test) is displayed in the Execute field and the current Loop # and specific test are shown below.
Page 476
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-5-1 Accessing the Monitoring Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) Figure 7-60 View Test Log — Full System Monitoring Test — Fixed Voltages 9.) Check that the sub-test passed and that result values are within the pre-defined Max and Min limits, as shown in Figure 7-60 «View Test Log — Full System Monitoring Test — Fixed Voltages»…
Page 477
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-5-1 Accessing the Monitoring Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) Figure 7-61 View Test Log — Full System Monitoring Test — Temperatures 11.)Check that the sub-test passed and that result values are within the pre-defined Max and Min limits, as shown in Figure 7-61 «View Test Log — Full System Monitoring Test — Temperatures»…
Page 478
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-5-1 Accessing the Monitoring Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) Figure 7-62 View Test Log — Full System Monitoring Test — Fans Speed 13.)Check that the sub-test passed and that result values are within the pre-defined Max and Min limits, as shown in Figure 7-60 «View Test Log — Full System Monitoring Test — Fixed Voltages»…
Page 479
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-5-1 Accessing the Monitoring Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) Figure 7-63 View Test Log — Full System Monitoring Test — Battery Parameters 15.)Check that the sub-test passed and that result values are within the pre-defined Upper and Lower limits, as shown in Figure 7-63 «View Test Log — Full System Monitoring Test — Battery Parameters»…
Page 480
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified but the results were marginal, perform calibration, as described in “DC Offset Calibration”…
Page 481
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-5-1 Accessing the Monitoring Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) 7-5-1-2 Fixed Voltages Test NOTE: For a description of this test, refer to the information in 7-2-4-3-2 «Fixed Voltages Test»…
Page 482
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-5-1 Accessing the Monitoring Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) • Green: All recommended tests for these components have been completed and no problems were identified.
Page 483
Accessing the Monitoring Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified but the results were marginal, perform calibration, as described in “DC Offset Calibration”…
Page 484
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-5-1-3 Temperatures Test NOTE: For a description of this test, refer to the information in 7-2-4-3-3 «Temperatures Test» on page 7-15.
Page 485
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL • Red: Problems were identified in these components during the performance of the test. • Yellow: The tests executed so far on these components have passed, but not all recommended tests have been performed.
Page 486
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified but the results were marginal, perform calibration, as described in “DC Offset Calibration”…
Page 487
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-5-1 Accessing the Monitoring Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) 7-5-1-4 Fans Speed Test NOTE: For a description of this test, refer to the information in 7-2-4-3-4 «Fans Speed Test»…
Page 488
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. 7-104 Section 7-5 — Monitoring Tests…
Page 489
If the problem persists, this indicates that either the specific board you tested is faulty or that another board that supports the operation of this board is faulty. Contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. 10.)Trackball to the Exit button and press Set to close the View Test Log dialog box.
Page 490
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-5-1 Accessing the Monitoring Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) 2.) Under the Special Instructions area, activate the Loops checkbox and select the required number of Loops from the combo box. 3.) Adjacent to On Fail, select either Stop or Continue, as required.
Page 491
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If the test fails, repeat the Fan Speed Test.
Page 492
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-5-1 Accessing the Monitoring Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) 7-5-1-6 Battery Parameters Test NOTE: For a description of this test, refer to the information in “Battery Parameters Test”…
Page 493
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. Chapter 7 — Diagnostics/Troubleshooting…
Page 494
If the problem persists, this indicates that either the specific board you tested is faulty or that another board that supports the operation of this board is faulty. Contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. 10.)Trackball to the Exit button and press Set to close the View Test Log dialog box.
Page 495
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-5-1 Accessing the Monitoring Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) 3.) Adjacent to On Fail, select either Stop or Continue, as required. Stopping on failure enables you to review a failed test, the moment it fails.
Page 496
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified but the results were marginal, perform calibration, as described in “DC Offset Calibration”…
Page 497
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 7-6 Performing Back End Diagnostics on the System The Back End Diagnostics Tests enable you to test the functionality of various Back End hardware components.
Page 498
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-6-1 Accessing the Back End Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) 7-6-1-1 PC Doctor NOTE: For a complete description of all PC Doctor tests, refer to the information in 7-2-4-4-1 «PC Doctor»…
Page 499
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-6-1 Accessing the Back End Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) Figure 7-77 Full Back End Test w/o Hard Disk Scan 2.) Under the Special Instructions area, activate the Loops checkbox and select the required number of Loops from the combo box.
Page 500
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified and the results were not marginal, verify that all system cables and…
Page 501
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-6-1 Accessing the Back End Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) 7-6-1-1-2 Full PC Doctor Test (50 min) NOTE: For a description of this test, refer to the information in — «Full PC Doctor Test (50 min)»…
Page 502
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified and the results were not marginal, verify that all system cables and…
Page 503
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-6-1 Accessing the Back End Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) 7-6-1-1-3 CPU Tests NOTE: For a description of these tests, refer to the information in — «CPU Tests»…
Page 504
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified and the results were not marginal, verify that all system cables and…
Page 505
If the problem persists, this indicates that either the specific board you tested is faulty or that another board that supports the operation of this board is faulty. Contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. 10.)Trackball to the Exit button and press Set to close the View Test Log dialog box.
Page 506
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-6-1 Accessing the Back End Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) 7-6-1-1-4 HD Test NOTE: For a description of these tests, refer to the information in — «HD Test»…
Page 507
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified and the results were not marginal, verify that all system cables and…
Page 508
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-6-1 Accessing the Back End Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) 7-6-1-1-5 Memory Test NOTE: For a description of these tests, refer to the information in — «Memory Test»…
Page 509
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified and the results were not marginal, verify that all system cables and…
Page 510
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-6-1 Accessing the Back End Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) 7-6-1-1-6 Video Test NOTE: For a description of these tests, refer to the information in — «Video Test»…
Page 511
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified and the results were not marginal, verify that all system cables and…
Page 512
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-6-1 Accessing the Back End Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) 7-6-1-1-7 PCI Test NOTE: For a description of this test, refer to the information in “PCI Test”…
Page 513
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified and the results were not marginal, verify that all system cables and…
Page 514
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-6-1 Accessing the Back End Diagnostic Test Options (cont’d) 7-6-1-1-8 Network Test NOTE: For a description of this test, refer to the information in — «Network Test»…
Page 515
If no problems were identified, it is recommended to re-boot the system (this is obligatory when prompted). • If no problems were identified but the problem persists, contact your local GE HEALTHCARE field engineer for assistance. • If errors were identified and the results were not marginal, verify that all system cables and…
Page 516
Section 7-7 Automatic Error Log The Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N automatically logs the software activity, sequences and error messages that occur during normal operation. Each day’s activity is compressed into a single daily logger report, with a time stamp appearing in each line of the report. Additional user comments and screen captures, can also be included in the report.
Page 517
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-7-2 Extracting Logs (cont’d) Figure 7-94 System Problem Reporting Dialog 3.) If use of the Advanced features is required, proceed to the following instructions, as applicable: •…
Page 518
To Format a CD: 1.) Insert the blank CD media into the DVD/CD-RW drive tray. 2.) On the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system, press the <Config> key. 3.) Select the Connectivity Tab and activate the Tools Tab.
Page 519
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-7-2 Extracting Logs (cont’d) 7-7-2-2 Enabling Extensive Logging NOTE: In some cases, the user may need to activate the Extensive Logging feature. This will allow the system to record logs in a more detailed format, specifically addressing an issue of suspected failure.
Page 520
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-7-2 Extracting Logs (cont’d) 1.) Perform step 1 step 2 on page 7-132. 2.) Click the Extensive Log button (refer to step 7-94 on page 7-133).
Page 521
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-7-2 Extracting Logs (cont’d) 7-7-2-3 Advanced Options 1.) From the System Problem Reporting dialog (Figure 7-94 «System Problem Reporting Dialog» on page 7-133), click the Options button.
Page 522
Provides details on the connectivity configuration. Recommended to include this whenever any type of connectivity problem arises. “Upload to GE” Tool Enables the user to export the log directly to GE HEALTHCARE for analysis. For details, see “Sending Log Files to GE” on page 7-139.
Page 523
5.) When export completed, press <Ctrl>+E to eject the media. 7-7-2-3-3 Sending Log Files to GE After exporting logs (with the Upload To GE Tool attachment) to the selected media (i.e. CD or Memory Stick), the media contains the zipped log file along with the binary (UploadLog.exe and other attachments) files that perform the upload of all exported files to the GE ftp site.
Page 524
Figure 7-100 Upload Complete 5.) Click Close to terminate and exit the Upload utility. 6.) Inform the local GE personnel that you have uploaded files to the GE ftp site. NOTE: In the event that the upload process fails, check your local network security settings to make sure that they did not prevent the upload.
Page 525
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-7-2 Extracting Logs (cont’d) The System Problem Reporting dialog opens:. Figure 7-101 System Problem Reporting — Advanced 2.) Under Advanced, click on the DBScan button. Chapter 7 — Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-141…
Page 526
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7-7-2 Extracting Logs (cont’d) The Database Scanning procedure commences, and a progress bar is displayed together with the message: The action may take a long time. Please wait..Figure 7-102 Database Scanning Procedure in Progress During this procedure, a log file which contains information about the integrity of the database will automatically be created and stored in the Logs directory (in the folder name Log).
Page 527: Table Of Contents

P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures Section 8-1 Overview 8-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 8 This chapter provides replacement procedures for Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N system parts, as outlined below.
Page 528
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 8-2 Cover Replacement Procedures 8-2-1 Overview of Covers Front View Rear View Figure 8-1 Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N Ultrasound Units Table 8-1 Vivid™…
Page 529
UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-2-1-1 Preparations Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. ELECTRICAL HAZARDS EXIST AT SEVERAL POINTS IN THE SYSTEM. DANGER FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH ALL HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES AND HIGH CURRENT LEVELS BEFORE REMOVING ANY OF THE COVERS.
Page 530
Figure 8-2 Right Side Cover (Longer Type) — Front and Inside Views 8-2-2-1 Tools None. 8-2-2-2 Preparations Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. Section 8-2 — Cover Replacement Procedures…
Page 531
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-2-2 Right Side Cover Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 8-2-2-3 Right Side Cover Removal Procedure 1) Gripping the recess located near the bottom of the cover (as shown on the left in Figure 8-3), pull the bottom of the cover out towards you to release it from the lower securing clip.
Page 532: Cover Replacement Procedures

8-7. 8-2-3-1 Tools None. 8-2-3-2 Preparations Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-2-3-3 Left Side Cover Removal Procedure 1) Gripping the recess located near the bottom of the cover (as shown in…
Page 533
Air Filter Replacement Procedure NOTE: Commencing with Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N ultrasound scanners version BT12, systems are supplied without an air filter. Therefore, for all BT versions, it is no longer necessary to perform the procedure described below.
Page 534
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-2-3 Left Side Cover Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 4.) Lifting up the free end of the Air Filter, release the other end from the two securing notches on the right cover, as shown in Figure 8-7.
Page 535
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-2-3 Left Side Cover Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 7.) Make sure the air filter is seated in the correct position then fasten the other end of the air filter onto the cover, by closing the securing clip — refer to Figure 8-6 on page 8-7 Figure 8-9…
Page 536
Tools Use the appropriate Phillips-type screwdrivers, as indicated in the right rear cover replacement procedures. 8-2-4-2 Preparations Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-2-4-3 Right Rear Cover Removal Procedure 1) Disconnect any peripherals currently connected to the system.
Page 537
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-2-4 Right Rear Cover Replacement Procedures (cont’d) Remove screw here Remove screw here Figure 8-11 Loosening the Securing Screws 7) Carefully lift the cover upwards sufficiently to clear the portion of the cover that overlaps the system chassis (shown in Figure…
Page 538
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-2-4 Right Rear Cover Replacement Procedures (cont’d) 8.) Pull the cover towards you and remove from the system. Figure 8-13 Removing the Right Rear Cover 8-2-4-4 Right Rear Cover Installation Procedure NOTE:…
Page 539
Tools Use the appropriate Phillips-type screwdrivers, as indicated in the left rear cover replacement procedures. 8-2-5-2 Preparations Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-2-5-3…
Page 540
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-2-5 Left Rear Cover Replacement Procedures (cont’d) Figure 8-15 Loosening the Securing Screw 4) Pull the cover upwards to release the two securing hooks (located on the inner right side of the cover) from the main assembly frame — see Figure 8-16.
Page 541
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-2-5 Left Rear Cover Replacement Procedures (cont’d) Figure 8-17 Removing the Left Rear Cover 6.) Pull the cover towards you and remove from the system. Chapter 8 — Replacement Procedures 8-15…
Page 542
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-2-5-4 Left Rear Cover Installation Procedure NOTE: When performing the following installation procedure steps, it may be helpful to review the movie clip previously referenced in the Left Rear Cover Removal Procedure.
Page 543
8-2-6-1 Tools Use the appropriate Phillips-type screwdriver, as indicated in the front cover replacement procedures. 8-2-6-2 Preparations Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-2-6-3…
Page 544
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-2-6 Front Cover Replacement Procedures (cont’d) Front Cover — from Right Side Front Cover — from Left Side Figure 8-19 Removing Screws from Front Cover Securing Tabs 5) Pull the lower portion of the cover away from the system main assembly frame to release it from the ball and snap-lock securing clips (see [1] in Figure…
Page 545
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-2-6 Front Cover Replacement Procedures (cont’d) 8.) Tilting the cover away from the main assembly frame (to clear the keyboard), continue pulling it towards you until it is completely removed from the system.
Page 546
Basket Replacement Procedure 8-2-7-1 Tools None 8-2-7-2 Preparations Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-2-7-3 Basket Removal Procedure 1) Remove all contents from the basket.
Page 547
Rear Folder Box Replacement Procedure 8-2-8-1 Tools None 8-2-8-2 Preparations Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-2-8-3 Rear Folder Box Removal Procedure 1) Remove all contents from the folder box.
Page 548
Tray Replacement Procedure 8-2-9-1 Tools None 8-2-9-2 Preparations Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-2-9-3 Tray Removal Procedure 1) Remove all contents from the tray.
Page 549
8-2-10 Bottom Rear Cover Replacement Procedures 8-2-10-1 Tools None. 8-2-10-2 Preparations Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-2-10-3 Bottom Rear Cover Removal Procedure NOTE:…
Page 550
8-2-11-1 Tools Use the appropriate Phillips screwdriver, as indicated in the DVD cover replacement procedure. 8-2-11-2 Preparations Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-2-11-3 DVD Cover Removal Procedure 1) Raise the control console to its maximum height.
Page 551
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-2-11 DVD Cover Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 6.) Pull out and remove the DVD cover. Figure 8-26 DVD Cover Removed 8-2-11-4 DVD Cover Installation Procedure NOTE:…
Page 552: Control Console Components Replacement Procedures

8-3-1-1 Tools Use the appropriate Phillips screwdriver, as indicated in the monitor replacement procedures. 8-3-1-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-3-1-3 Monitor Removal Procedure 1) Working from the front of the system, lower the console to the maximum down position.
Page 553
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-3-1 Monitor Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 4.) Carefully fold the monitor forwards until it is in the fully-folded position (i.e., face down), as shown Figure 8-28 below.
Page 554
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-3-1 Monitor Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 7.) Using a screwdriver, release the DVI cable and the power cable connectors from the monitor (loosening the two screws on each side of the cables to disconnect them) — see Figure 8-31 below.
Page 555
— refer to Figure 8-27 on page 8-26. 8.) Adhere the appropriate Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system label to the rear of the monitor. 9.) Set the appropriate LCD type, as described in 6-1-2-7 «Display Type Setup» on page 6-8.
Page 556
8-3-2-1 Tools Use the appropriate flat and Phillips type screwdrivers and the appropriate Allen keys. 8-3-2-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-3-2-3…
Page 557
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3.) Remove the roller-screw from the Alignment Block — Figure 8-34. Alignment Block Remove Roller-Screw Figure 8-34 Roller-screw Located on the Alignment Block 4.) To remove the alignment block, first loosen the Monitor Arm locking bolt a few turns to create some freedom of movement for the Monitor Arm assembly so that it can be raised and lowered on the upper arm securing pin -…
Page 558
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 9.) Remove the lower cable bracket — Figure 8-36. Lower Roller-Screw Lower Cable Bracket Figure 8-36 Lower Cable Bracket and Lower Roller-Screw 10.)Remove the lower roller-screw — Figure 8-36.
Page 559
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-3-2-4 Monitor Arm Installation Procedure 1.) Return the lower washer to its position on the securing pin — Figure 8-38.
Page 560
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4.) Return the Locking Bolt to its location on the securing pin and turn it a few turns only — Figure 8-41.
Page 561
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 9.) To return the alignment block to its position on the support pin, raise the support arm and insert the alignment block to its position above the securing bolt, see Figure 8-35.
Page 562
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 16.)Install the Monitor as described in the “Monitor Installation Procedure” on page 8-29. 17) Lower the console to the maximum down position. 18.)Turn ON power to the system.
Page 563
8-3-3-1 Tools Use the appropriate flat and Phillips type screwdrivers and the appropriate Allen keys. 8-3-3-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-3-3-3…
Page 564
“Monitor Installation Procedure” on page 8-29. 4.) Adhere the appropriate Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system label to the rear of the monitor. 5.) Proceed to perform the following functionality tests: “Grounding Continuity” on page 10-23 “Chassis Current Leakage Test” on page 10-24 “Monitor Movement Test”…
Page 565
Use the appropriate flat and Phillips-type screwdrivers and the appropriate Hex wrench keys, as indicated in the keyboard assembly replacement procedure. 8-3-4-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7.
Page 566
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-3-4 Keyboard Assembly Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 4) Loosen the two captive Allen screws on the left side, as shown in Figure 8-47 below (arrows marked in the figure indicate the screw locations).
Page 567
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-3-4 Keyboard Assembly Replacement Procedure (cont’d) Release here Release here Figure 8-50 Releasing the Data Cable Securing Tags 9.) Unplug the Data cable, as shown in Figure 8-51.
Page 568
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-3-4-4 Keyboard Assembly Installation Procedure NOTE: When performing the following installation procedure steps, it may be helpful to review the appropriate movie clips previously referenced in the Keyboard Assembly Removal Procedure.
Page 569
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-3-4 Keyboard Assembly Replacement Procedure (cont’d) When the installation process is complete, the following screen is displayed: 14.)Press Set on the keyboard, eject the CD, and reboot the system. 15.)With the system up and running, press Alt + L.
Page 570
8-3-5-1 Tools Use the appropriate flat and Phillips type screwdrivers and the appropriate Allen keys. 8-3-5-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-3-5-3…
Page 571
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3.) Remove the DVI cable clip — be careful to hold the clip screw to prevent it from falling through the shaft — Figure 8-55.
Page 572
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5.) Remove two brake lever retaining screws — Figure 8-57 and remove the Gas Spring lever. Up-Down Lever Separated from Gas Spring Cable Lever Two Brake Lever Retaining Screws Figure 8-57 Up-Down Lever Separated from Gas Spring Cable Lever 6.) To release the Keyboard Interface Assembly from the lower support arm, unscrew the retaining bolt…
Page 573
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL inwards, gently turn the base from side to side while pulling upwards and away from the support arm. 8.) Carefully unthread the cables from the Key Board Interface Assembly as shown in the movie clip. 8-3-5-4 Keyboard Interface Assembly Installation Procedure NOTE:…
Page 574
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 2.) Position the Keyboard Interface Assembly on the Joint Assembly and thread the gas spring cable through the black Keyboard Interface Assembly cone and lower the assembly onto the joint. Interface Assembly Cone Gas Spring Cable Figure 8-60 Keyboard Interface Assembly on the Joint Assembly…
Page 575
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6.) Return the gas spring cable lever to its position, hooking the gas spring cable lever onto the second notch on the gas spring cable — Figure 8-62.
Page 576
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8.) Attach the Up-Down Lever to the cable holder lever and fasten it with the retaining screw (see Figure 8-64).
Page 577
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-3-5-4-1 Adjusting the Tension of the Up-Down Cables NOTE: The following procedure describes how to adjust the tension in the Up-Down Cable to enable raising and lowering of the Keyboard Interface base, using the system chassis height adjustment lever.
Page 578
8-3-6-1 Tools Use the appropriate screwdriver as indicated in the Probe Shelf Replacement procedure. 8-3-6-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-3-6-3 Probe Shelf Removal Procedure 1) Remove the Keyboard Assembly as described in the “Keyboard Assembly Removal Procedure”…
Page 579
Swivel and Up-Down Handle Replacement Procedure 8-3-7-1 Tools Flat and Phillips screwdrivers as needed. 8-3-7-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-3-7-3 Swivel and Up-Down Handle Replacement Procedure 1) Remove the Operator Panel as described in the “Keyboard Assembly Removal Procedure”…
Page 580
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4.) Remove the spring clips securing the particular handle to be removed — Figure 8-67. Up-down Handle Swivel Handle Spring Clip Figure 8-67 Removing Spring Clip that Secures the Swivel Handle 5.) Release the small spring that presses on the handle to be replaced -…
Page 581
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7.) Disconnect the up-down/swivel cable from the handle to be replaced and slide the handle sideways to remove it from the supporting shaft — Figure 8-69.
Page 582
There are two types of rear handle removal procedure, as follows: • On older-type Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N systems, the rear handles are glued to the aluminium bars and have to be cut and peeled off the aluminium bars to remove them.
Page 583
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-3-8-3-1 Removing Handles Glued in Position When removing the rear handles, do not use aggressive cleaning materials and do not use tools CAUTION that impact or that might damage the aluminium handle bars.
Page 584
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-3-8-4 Rear Handle Installation Procedure 8-3-8-4-1 Installing Handles Glued in Position NOTE: Identify the left and right rear handle before starting this procedure. 1.) Apply the RTV 102 silicone sealant to a few points along the aluminium bar.
Page 585: Keyboard Assembly Replacement Procedures

8-4-1-1 Tools Use the appropriate screwdriver, as indicated in the Keyboard Bottom Cover replacement procedure. 8-4-1-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-4-1-3 Keyboard Bottom Cover Removal Procedure 1.) Remove the Keyboard Assembly, as described in the…
Page 586
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-4-1 Keyboard Bottom Cover Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 4.) Disconnect the two USB cables from the side of the trackball (Figure 8-74).
Page 587
8-4-2-1 Tools Use the appropriate flat and Phillips type screwdrivers and the appropriate Allen keys. 8-4-2-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-4-2-3 Upper Arm Removal Procedure 1) If the rear tray is attached to the system, remove it before starting the procedure.
Page 588
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 9.) Using a screwdriver, tap out the support pin — Figure 8-76 on page 8-62. Figure 8-76 Tapping Out the Upper Arm Support Pin 10.)Remove the Upper Arm.
Page 589
The cables must protrude on either side of the Upper Arm in a specified manner as described below. Also, the cable length on either side of the Upper Arm is specific for the Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N system, respectively.
Page 590
(Figure 8-77); the USB Keyboard-to-Distribution cable protrudes 21 cm (not shown). Installation Procedure — Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N Systems 1.) Prepare the required cable lengths for installation in the Upper Arm, as described above. 2.) Install the cables in the Upper arm securing them with the appropriate cable holders and clips — see Figure 8-78.
Page 591
8-4-3-1 Tools Use the appropriate flat and Phillips type screwdrivers and the appropriate Allen keys. 8-4-3-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-4-3-3…
Page 592
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 9.) Release the two locking screws that secure the two Joint Assembly supporting pins — Figure 8-81. Two Joint Assembly Supporting Pins (one on either side) Locking screws that secure Joint Assembly Pin…
Page 593
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 11.)Using a screwdriver, tap out the supporting pins to release the Joint Assembly — Figure 8-83. Tap out Supporting Figure 8-83 Removing the Joint Assembly 12.)Release the communication cables from the arm.
Page 594
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 12) Lower the console to the maximum down position. 13.)Turn ON power to the system. 14.)Check for proper up/down and side-to-side movement of the operator panel and monitor, as described in “Mechanical Functional Tests”…
Page 595
Use the appropriate flat screwdriver and T10 Torx screwdriver (T8 may also be used), as indicated in the Alphanumeric Keyboard replacement procedure. 8-4-4-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7.
Page 596
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-4-4 Alphanumeric Keyboard Replacement Procedure (cont’d) NOTE: When performing the next step, for ribbon cable connectors place a flat screwdriver into the gap beneath the connector, as shown in the example in Figure 8-86.
Page 597
Use the appropriate screwdriver and 5.5 mm nut driver/box spanner, as indicated in the Mechanical Trackball and Housing replacement procedure. 8-4-5-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7.
Page 598
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6.) Remove each of the three nuts from the Trackball Board and housing, as indicated in Figure 8-88 Trackball Board and Housing Cable Connector…
Page 599
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3.) Secure the Trackball Housing using the three new nuts supplied with the kit (see Figure 8-87). 4.) Carefully re-connect the two cables (previously disconnected), as indicated in Figure 8-89.
Page 600
ERVICE ANUAL 8-4-6 TGC Board Replacement Procedure (New-type Operator Panel) NOTE: The procedures described in this section are applicable to all Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N systems supplied with the new-type Operator Panel (Figure 8-93). NOTE: For Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N systems with the older-type Operator Panel, refer to the instructions provided in “TGC Board Replacement Procedure (Old-type Operator Panel)”…
Page 601
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6.) Disconnect the black cable — encircled in Figure 8-91. Figure 8-91 TGC Board 7.) Remove the TGC Board. Chapter 8 — Replacement Procedures 8-75…
Page 602
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-4-6-4 TGC Board Installation Procedure (New-type Operator Panel) 1.) Carefully place the new TGC Board in the keyboard assembly. Make sure it is correctly positioned. 2.) Return and fasten the four retaining screws (previously loosened) to secure the TGC Board firmly in position, as indicated in Figure…
Page 603
Use the appropriate flat screwdriver and T10 Torx screwdriver (T8 may also be used), as indicated in the TGC Board replacement procedure. 8-4-7-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7.
Page 604
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-4-7-4 TGC Board Installation Procedure 1.) Carefully place the new TGC Board in the keyboard assembly (refer to Figure 8-92).
Page 605
Extended Keyboard Replacement Procedure (New-type Operator Panel) NOTE: The procedures described in this section are applicable to all Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N systems supplied with the new-type Operator Panel. Figure 8-93 Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N — New-type Operator Panel…
Page 606
Use the appropriate flat and Phillips-type screwdrivers, Hex wrench keys, and a No. 10 Torx screwdriver. 8-4-8-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7.
Page 607
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6.) Loosen and remove all Extended Keyboard retaining screws — refer to the illustration in Figure 8-97 on page 8-83.
Page 608
8-4-9 Extended Keyboard Replacement Procedure (Old-type Operator Panel) The procedures described in this section are applicable to any Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N system with the old-type Operator Panel. When performing these procedures, take precautions to avoid damage of CAUTION electrostatic-sensitive components.
Page 609
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-4-9 Extended Keyboard Replacement Procedure (Old-type Operator Panel) (cont’d) 7.) Disconnect the seven cable connectors, as indicated in Figure 8-97.
Page 610
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-4-9-5 Releasing an Extended Keyboard Key 1.) Using a sticky strip (e.g. masking tape or scotch tape), remove the key as follows: b) Pull the key up a) Adhere the sticky strip to the key c) Key removed…
Page 611
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL b.) Remove any surplus plastic tape gently with sharp tool (e.g. scalpel or similar) — Figure 8-100. Figure 8-100 Removing Surplus Plastic Tape Note: Pay attention not to damage the key surface or the painted lettering.
Page 612
ERVICE ANUAL 8-4-10 LEDs and Soft Menu Board Replacement (New-type OP) NOTE: The procedures described in this section are applicable to all Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N systems supplied with the new-type Operator Panel (Figure 8-93). NOTE: For systems with the older-type Operator Panel, refer to the instructions provided in “LEDs and Soft…
Page 613
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4.) Unscrew the 10 Torx retaining screws and remove them from the LED and Soft Menu Board — those visible in Figure 8-101 are encircled.
Page 614
8-4-11 LEDs and Soft Menu Board Replacement (Old-type OP) The procedures described in this section are applicable to any Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N system with the old-type Operator Panel When performing these procedures, take precautions to avoid damage of NOTICE electrostatic-sensitive components.
Page 615
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7.) Loosen and remove the seven star-shape screws that fasten the Soft Menu board in position, as shown in Figure 8-102.
Page 616
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-4-12 Alphanumeric Keycap Replacement Procedure 8-4-12-1 Tools Use the appropriate flat screwdriver, as indicated in the keycap replacement procedure. 8-4-12-2 Preparation None…
Page 617
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-4-13 Rotary Knob Replacement Procedure 8-4-13-1 Tools Use the appropriate flat screwdriver, as indicated in the rotary knob replacement procedure. 8-4-13-2 Preparation None…
Page 618
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-4-14 ATGC Keycap Replacement Procedure 8-4-14-1 Tools Use the appropriate flat screwdriver, as indicated in the ATGC Keycap replacement procedure. 8-4-14-2 Preparation None…
Page 619
Use the appropriate flat screwdriver and T10 Torx screwdriver (T8 may also be used), as indicated in the Speaker replacement procedure. 8-4-15-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7.
Page 620
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-4-15 Speaker Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 5.) Loosen and remove the four star-shape screws that fasten each of the Speakers in position, as shown in Figure 8-102.
Page 621: Cable Replacement Procedures

Use the appropriate flat and Phillips screwdrivers, Allen Key, appropriate flat spanner, and diagonal side cutter as indicated in the Keyboard or Monitor Cable replacement procedure. 8-5-1-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7.
Page 622
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 1.) Remove the LCD arm upper cover from the Monitor Arm Assembly (as shown in Figure 8-109) to expose the LCD cable. Upper Cover Figure 8-109 Removing the LCD Arm Upper Cover 2.) Remove the lower cover from the Monitor Arm Assembly, as shown in…
Page 623
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5.) Slide the Power cable (the thinner, black cable) through the opening and slide it down (Figure 8-111). Cables in New Position Slide Cables Down Here Figure 8-111 Sliding the Cables through the Opening…
Page 624
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3.) Using an Allen key, remove the Alignment Block as shown in Figure 8-113. If necessary, use a flat screwdriver for leverage when loosening the block, taking care not to damage the cables.
Page 625
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 7.) Cut the two tie wraps, as indicated in Figure 8-115. Figure 8-115 Location of Tie Wraps 8.) Using an Allen key, release the screw and nut that secure the arm for the up/down mechanism and move the arm to one side, as shown in Figure 8-116.
Page 626
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-5-1-3-3 Removing Cables from the Upper Arm Assembly Note: After removing cables from the Keyboard Interface Assembly, it is recommended to lean the keyboard interface platform backwards and to place protective material between the lower arm and the handle, as indicated in Figure…
Page 627
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 2.) Loosen (but do not remove) the two lower cable securing brackets, as indicated in Figure 8-119. Bracket Bracket Figure 8-119 Lower Cable Securing Brackets 3.) Proceed to remove the four cables from the Keyboard Interface Assembly by passing them through the aperture in the centre of the platform in the following order:…
Page 628
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL b.) Push the 90° Data cable down through the aperture, as shown in Figure 8-121. Figure 8-121 Data Cable c.) Push the DVI cable down through the aperture, as shown in Figure 8-122.
Page 629
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL d.) Push the LCD power cable down through the aperture, as shown in Figure 8-123. Figure 8-123 LCD Power Cable 8-5-1-3-4 Removing Cables from the Distributions Interface Board (DIB) 1.) Remove the system covers, as described in the following procedures (see also):…
Page 630
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 8-124 System with Covers Removed 2.) Remove the central metal bracket, as indicated in Figure 8-125. Bracket Removed Bracket Figure 8-125 Bracket Removal 8-104…
Page 631
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3.) To complete the procedure, disconnect the relevant cables from the Distribution Interface Board (DIB); see Figure 8-126 Figure 8-126 Cables Connected to Distribution Interface Board 8-5-1-4 Keyboard and Monitor Cable Installation Procedure 1.) Re-connect all the relevant cables (including the new Keyboard power cable and Monitor cable) to…
Page 632
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-5-1-4-1 Installing the Cables in the Monitor Arm Assembly The cables are threaded from the Keyboard Interface Assembly to the Monitor Arm Assembly and upwards to the LCD monitor;…
Page 633
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8.) Place the Power cable (the thinner, black cable) and the DVI cable (the thicker, grey cable) together with the attached ferrite into their positions on the Monitor Arm assembly and secure them with the white bracket, using the two Phillips screws previously removed, as shown in Figure…
Page 634
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL opening and slide it upwards, as indicated in Figure 8-129. 12.)Re-connect the GND cable to the centre of the upper arm — see Figure 8-110.
Page 635: Lower Section Components Replacement Procedures

4-7. 8-6-1-3 Cabinet Cage Assembly Opening and Removal Procedure 1) Remove the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N left and right side covers, as described in the “Left Side Cover Removal Procedure” on page 8-6 “Right Side Cover Removal Procedure” on page 8-5.
Page 636
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-1 Opening and Removing the Cabinet Cage Assembly (cont’d) Fastening Hook Figure 8-131 Fastening the Cage Door Open 5.) Release the end of the USB cable from the cable clip, as shown below. Cable Clip Figure 8-132 Releasing USB Cable from the Cable Clip 6.) Release the LAN connector from the Back End.
Page 637
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-1 Opening and Removing the Cabinet Cage Assembly (cont’d) 7.) Unfasten the two knurled (ridged) screws on the Docking Connector and release the Docking Connector from the Back End (Figure 8-134 Docking Connector…
Page 638
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 10.)Disconnect the VGA cable from the Back End (use a flat screwdriver to release the two screws on the connector). Figure 8-137 Releasing Connectors on the VGA Cable 11.)Pull down the spring latch to release the cage door from its securing hinge — see Figure…
Page 639
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 13.)Unfasten each of the two thumbscrews on either side of the cabinet cage, as shown in Figure 8-140. Figure 8-140 Cabinet Cage Thumbscrews 14.)Unfold the cage to the fully-open position, as shown in Figure 8-141.
Page 640
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-1-4 Cabinet Cage Assembly Closing and Installation Procedure NOTE: When performing the following installation procedure steps, it may be helpful to review the movie clips previously referenced in the Cabinet Cage Assembly Opening and Removal Procedure.
Page 641
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Note: When closing the cage door, take care to ensure that the protective gasket (kapton strip) surrounding the PSB (Probe Selection Board) — shown in Figure 8-143 — is properly seated and does not become pinched or damaged.
Page 642
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-2 Battery Replacement Procedure NOTE: This procedure is applicable to Vivid S6 N systems only. 8-6-2-1 Tools Use the appropriate Phillips-type screwdrivers as indicated in the Battery replacement procedure. 8-6-2-2 Time Required 1 minute…
Page 643
Figure 8-146 Sliding the Vivid S6 N Battery out of the Battery Compartment WHEN REMOVING A DEFECTIVE BATTERY, ENSURE THAT IT IS DISPOSED OF NOTE: IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL REGULATIONS. ALTERNATIVELY, FORWARD IT FOR PROPER DISPOSAL. GE HEALTHCARE Chapter 8 — Replacement Procedures 8-117…
Page 644
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DIS-ASSEMBLE OR ALTER THE BATTERY! Always observe the precautions listed in 1-3-5 «Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N Battery Safety» on page 1- use only batteries approved by GE HEALTHCARE as suitable for use with the Vivid S6 N CAUTION ultrasound scanner 1) Holding the cabinet cage assembly steady with one hand, carefully slide the replacement battery sideways into the battery compartment.
Page 645
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-3 Battery Bracket Replacement Procedure NOTE: This procedure is applicable to Vivid S6 N systems only. 8-6-3-1 Tools Use the appropriate Phillips-type screwdrivers and a side cutter as indicated in the Battery Bracket replacement procedure.
Page 646
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL NOTE: The bracket cannot be removed completely at this stage as it still connected to the system via the battery cable, as explained in the next step. Figure 8-148 Removing the Battery Bracket 8.) Tilt the battery bracket sideways (swing it around), then disconnect the battery cable connector from the BEP…
Page 647
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-3-5 Battery Bracket Installation Procedure NOTE: When performing the following installation procedure steps, it may be helpful to review the appropriate movie clips previously referenced in the 8-6-3-4 «Battery Bracket Removal Procedure»…
Page 648
Use the appropriate flat and Phillips-type screwdrivers as indicated in the Hard Disk replacement procedure. 8-6-4-2 Time Required 10 minutes 8-6-4-3 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-6-4-4 Hard Disk Removal Procedure 1) Remove the left and right side covers, as described in the 8-2-3-3 «Left Side Cover Removal…
Page 649
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-4 Hard Disk Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 4) Working from the side of the cage, use a small Phillips screwdriver to loosen and remove the screw from the metal securing plate that holds the Hard Disk in position (as shown in Figure 8-152 below).
Page 650
Figure 8-152 on page 8-123. NOTE: When inserting the hard disk and bracket into it’s slot in the Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N cabinet cage assembly, check that the plastic buffer strip is properly in position as shown in Figure 8-154.
Page 651
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL To identify which hard disk is installed on your system, boot up the system and enter the BIOS configuration as described in “Setting the BIOS”…
Page 652
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5.) Insert the appropriate software installation CD into the CD drive. The following options are displayed: NOTE: If you need to abort the process at this stage, prior to formatting, do so by pressing the On/Off switch and holding down for a few seconds until the system shuts down.
Page 653
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-4-6 Hard Disk Duplication NOTE: In some instances, it may be necessary to duplicate a customer’s existing hard disk. The duplication procedure is performed using a USB to SATA / PATA adaptor.
Page 654
“Hard Disk Removal Procedure” on page 8-122. 5.) Reconnect the AC cable and battery and power ON the Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit. 6.) Perform a full software installation procedure, as described in “Software Loading” on page 8-207.
Page 655
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 13.)Plug the adaptor into the AC power outlet and verify that the power indicator light is ON. 14.)Plug the adaptor’s USB cable into the system and wait a few seconds. 15.)Open the Explorer window (eight partitions will now be shown, as shown in Figure 8-159 below).
Page 656
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 8-160 Disabling SQL Service The Sybase Central sub-directory displays in the left pane — see Figure 8-161 below. Figure 8-161 Sybase Central Dialog Box 8-130 Section 8-6 — Lower Section Components Replacement Procedures…
Page 657
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 19.)In the left pane under “Services”, select LocalArchive. 20.)On the system console press the Update/Menu button and then on the screen click Stop. The Local Archive status changes from Running to Stopped.
Page 658
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 8-163 Desktop Screen 28.)Double-click the ReplaceCompName utility. The IBUtil screen will be displayed, as shown in Figure 8-164 below.
Page 659
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 29.)Click OK. The following message is displayed: 30.)Click OK to close the message box. NOTE: The DB links change according to the new system serial number to enable proper link functionality.
Page 660
Use the appropriate Phillips and flat screwdrivers, as indicated in the BEP replacement procedure. 8-6-5-2 Time Required 15 minutes 8-6-5-3 Preparations Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-134 Section 8-6 — Lower Section Components Replacement Procedures…
Page 661
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-5-4 BEP Removal Procedure 1) Remove the left and right side covers, as described in the 8-2-3-3 «Left Side Cover Removal Procedure»…
Page 662
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-5 BEP Replacement Procedure (cont’d) Proceed to disconnect the following cables from their connectors on the BEP (refer to Figure 8-167): a.) Disconnect the Fan-to-BEP power cable…
Page 663
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-5 BEP Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 10) Carefully lift the BEP out of the cage assembly and remove it from the system, as shown in Figure 8-169 below.
Page 664
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-5 BEP Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 8-6-5-5 BEP Installation Procedure NOTE: When performing the following installation procedure steps, it may be helpful to review the appropriate movie clips previously referenced in the 8-6-5-4 «BEP Removal Procedure»…
Page 665
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-5 BEP Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 11.)Proceed to perform the following functionality tests: 10-6-4 «Grounding Continuity» on page 10-23 10-6-5 «Chassis Current Leakage Test» on page 10-24 7-2-4-2-1 «Calibration»…
Page 666
Use the appropriate flat screwdriver, as indicated in the ECG Module Assembly replacement procedure. 8-6-6-2 Time Required 10 minutes 8-6-6-3 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-6-6-4 ECG Module Assembly Removal Procedure 1) Remove the system left and right side covers, as described in the 8-2-3-3 «Left Side Cover Removal…
Page 667
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-6 ECG Module Assembly Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 4) Loosen the three screws on the fastening bracket, as indicated in Figure 8-171.
Page 668
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-6 ECG Module Assembly Replacement Procedure (cont’d) When disconnecting the cable, it is necessary to press the cable connector latch down (Figure 8-173): ECG Cable…
Page 669
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-6 ECG Module Assembly Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 4) Turn the ECG Module assembly (with bracket attached) over, ready to place it in the correct location as shown in Figure 8-176.
Page 670
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-6 ECG Module Assembly Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 11.)Proceed to perform the following functionality tests: 10-6-6 «Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage – Lead-to-Ground» on page 10-26 10-6-7 «Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage –…
Page 671
8-6-7-2 Time Required 15 minutes 8-6-7-3 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-6-7-4 DC-to-DC Power Supply Removal Procedure 1) Remove the left and right side covers, as described in the 8-2-3-3 «Left Side Cover Removal…
Page 672
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-7 DC-to-DC Power Supply Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 6.) Loosen and remove the 5 screws that secure the DC-to-DC Power Supply to the cage assembly (see Figure 8-178 below).
Page 673
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-7-5 DC-to-DC Power Supply Installation Procedure NOTE: When performing the following installation procedure steps, it may be helpful to review the movie clip previously referenced in the 8-6-7-4 «DC-to-DC Power Supply Removal Procedure»…
Page 674
8-6-8-2 Time Required 15 minutes 8-6-8-3 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-6-8-4 PSB Board Removal Procedure 1) Remove the system left and right side covers, as described in the 8-2-3-3 «Left Side Cover Removal…
Page 675
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-8 PSB (Probe Select Board) Board Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 5) Proceed as follows: a.) Lift the ECG Connector up to expose the bracket, as shown in Figure 8-182.
Page 676
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-8 PSB (Probe Select Board) Board Replacement Procedure (cont’d) c.) Push the ECG Connector all the way down through the rectangular hole in the PSB Board (see Figure 8-184).
Page 677
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-8 PSB (Probe Select Board) Board Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 7.) Loosen and remove the screw that secures the PIB-to-PSB flex cable in position and disconnect the flex cable (see Figure 8-186).
Page 678
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-8 PSB (Probe Select Board) Board Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 8-6-8-5 PSB Board Installation Procedure NOTE: When performing the following installation procedure steps, it may be helpful to review the movie clips previously referenced in the 8-6-8-4 «PSB Board Removal Procedure»…
Page 679
Use the appropriate flat and Phillips-type screwdrivers as indicated in the PIB replacement procedure. 8-6-9-2 Time Required 10 minutes 8-6-9-3 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-6-9-4 PIB Board Removal Procedure 1) Remove the system left and right side covers, as described in the “Left Side Cover Removal…
Page 680
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-9 PIB (Probe Interface Board) Board Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 6.) Disconnect the flex cable from the PIB Board. 7.) Loosen and remove the five screws holding the PIB Board in position (see Figure 8-189).
Page 681
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-9 PIB (Probe Interface Board) Board Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 8-6-9-5 PIB Board Installation Procedure NOTE: When performing the following installation procedure steps, it may be helpful to review the movie clips previously referenced in the 8-6-9-4 «PIB Board Removal Procedure»…
Page 682
Use the appropriate Phillips and flat screwdrivers, as indicated in the board replacement procedures. 8-6-10-2 Time Required 15 minutes 8-6-10-3 Preparations Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-6-10-4 TR32 and RFI Boards Removal Procedure 1) Remove the system left and right side covers, as described in the 8-2-3-3 «Left Side Cover Removal…
Page 683
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-10 TR32 and RFI Boards Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 7) Loosen and remove the 10 Phillips screws that fasten the RFI board in position — Figure 8-192.
Page 684
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL NOTE: Although the securing screws have been removed from the RFI Board (step 7), it is still secured on the cabinet cage assembly by way of a metal spline. It is necessary to perform the next step in order to release the RFI Board and so facilitate its removal from the cage assembly.
Page 685
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 12.)Detach the RFI Board from the TR32 Boards (separate by gently pulling them apart), as shown in Figure 8-196 below.
Page 686
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-10-5 TR32 and RFI Boards Installation Procedure NOTE: This procedure applies to replacement of one or more of the defective boards (TR32A and/or TR32B and/or RFI).
Page 687
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 2) Re-connect the two TR32 Boards to each other (gently press together as shown in Figure 8-201). Figure 8-201 Reattaching the Two TR32 Boards to Each Other 3.) Prepare the RFI Board by applying a strip of Kapton tape to each of the two areas illustrated in Figure 8-202 Kapton Tape…
Page 688
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 4.) Attach the TR32 Boards to the RFI Board by gently pressing the two parts together as shown in Figure 8-203.
Page 689
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Return and fasten the 10 screws (previously removed) to secure the RFI board in position — refer to Figure 8-192.
Page 690
Use the appropriate flat and Phillips-type screwdrivers, as indicated in the fan replacement procedure. 8-6-11-2 Time Required 15 minutes 8-6-11-3 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-6-11-4 Fan and Fan Board Removal Procedure 1) Remove the system left and right side covers, as described in the 8-2-3-3 «Left Side Cover Removal…
Page 691
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-11 Fans and Fan Board Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 5) Carefully remove the fan by pulling it towards you. Leave each of the blue-colored shock absorbers in position on the mounting pin at each of the four corners (see Figure 8-206 on page 8-165).
Page 692
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-11 Fans and Fan Board Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 8-6-11-5 Fan and Fan Board Installation Procedure NOTE: When performing the following installation procedure steps, it may be helpful to review the movie clip previously referenced in the Fan and Fan Board Removal Procedure.
Page 693
Use the appropriate flat and Phillips-type screwdrivers, and a suitably-sized T-Handle Hex Wrench, as indicated in the Peripherals AC Outlet Connectors Panel replacement procedure. 8-6-12-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7.
Page 694
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6.) Release the cable clamps using a T-Handle Hex Wrench (or socket with extension piece) — see Figure 8-209. Figure 8-209 Releasing the Cable Clamps NOTE: Keep the cable clamps for the installation procedure and note the order of removal of the various spring…
Page 695
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8.) Disconnect the AC cable from the AC box — Figure 8-211 AC Cable Figure 8-211 Disconnecting the AC Cable from the AC Box 9.) Gently ease out the AC cable from behind the DIB (Figure 8-212) and remove the AC peripheral…
Page 696
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 10.)Disconnect the power cable from the default printer — Figure 8-213. Printer Power Cable Figure 8-213 Disconnecting the Printer Power Cable 11.)Remove the AC Outlet Peripheral Connectors Panel.
Page 697
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6.) Reconnect the ground cables and replace the tie-wraps previously removed. 7.) Replace the cable clamps. 8.) Reconnect any peripherals previously connected to the system. 9.) Return the system bottom rear cover, as described in the “Bottom Rear Cover Installation Procedure”…
Page 698
Use the appropriate flat and Phillips-type screwdrivers and a wire cutter as indicated in the Sub-woofer replacement procedure. 8-6-13-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7.
Page 699
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6.) Remove the Sub-woofer from the top of the AC Distribution box (together with the cable attached) — see Figure 8-217.
Page 700
Use the appropriate flat and Phillips-type screwdrivers and a wire cutter as indicated in the DIB replacement procedure. 8-6-14-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7.
Page 701
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-14 DIB (Distribution Interface Board) Replacement Procedure (cont’d) NOTE: Refer also to the schematic diagram in Figure 8-219. R2419175-2 R2419151 DVR PWR R2419174…
Page 702
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-14 DIB (Distribution Interface Board) Replacement Procedure (cont’d) While carefully lifting the DIB Box upwards, disconnect the LAN cable connection from underneath then remove the DIB Box from the system — see Figure 8-221 below.
Page 703
Use the appropriate flat and Phillips-type screwdrivers as indicated in the AC Distribution Box replacement procedure. 8-6-15-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7.
Page 704
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL AC Box Supporting Screws Ground Leads Disconnect Power Cables Figure 8-223 AC Distribution Box Secured with Two Supporting Screws 3.) Disconnect the two power cables (seen in Figure 8-223) from the AC Box by squeezing the plastic…
Page 705
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-15-4 AC Distribution Box (Type B) Installation Procedure 1.) Fasten the ground lead (previously disconnected from the AC Distribution Box that has been removed) to the new AC Distribution Box — as illustrated (on left) in Figure 8-225.
Page 706
It is necessary to blank the two AC Outlet ports (previously used for connection of peripherals) on the Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N Left Rear Cover, using the plastic AC Outlet Cover (P/N 5446701) which is supplied in the AC Distribution Box Kit. In addition, a plain white label is used to cover the power details (Max.
Page 707
Use the appropriate flat and Phillips-type screwdrivers as indicated in the AC Distribution Box replacement procedure. 8-6-16-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7.
Page 708
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL AC Box Supporting Screws Ground Leads Disconnect Power Cables Figure 8-229 AC Distribution Box Secured with Two Supporting Screws 2.) Disconnect the two power cables (seen in Figure 8-233) from the AC Box by squeezing the plastic…
Page 709
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3.) Return the two supporting screws (previously removed) to their positions and fasten them securely (shown in Figure 8-229). 4.) Connect the Printer power cable (PN5448872) to the printer and attach it to the system chassis using the retaining clips previously installed.
Page 710
Use the appropriate flat and Phillips-type screwdrivers as indicated in the AC Distribution Box replacement procedure. 8-6-17-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7.
Page 711
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL AC Box Supporting Screws Ground Leads Disconnect Power Cables Figure 8-233 AC Box Secured with Two Supporting Screws 2.) Disconnect the two power cables (seen in Figure 8-233) from the AC Box by squeezing the plastic retainer clips inwards…
Page 712
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5.) Remove the Fan Assembly as follows: a.) Unscrew the four retaining screws indicated in Figure 8-235. b.) Remove the fan protecting grid and carefully pull the Fan Assembly away from the AC Box chassis.
Page 713
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-6-17-4 AC Distribution Box (Type A) Installation Procedure 1.) Inspect the rubber bumpers on the AC Box housing (see Figure 8-235) and if necessary, replace.
Page 714
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Note: When reconnecting the ground leads, there are two spring washers that should be installed in the order shown in Figure 8-237.
Page 715: Mechanical Components Replacement Procedures

P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 8-7 Mechanical Components Replacement Procedures 8-7-1 Foot Rest Replacement Procedure 8-7-1-1 Tools None 8-7-1-2 Preparations None 8-7-1-3 Foot Rest Removal Procedure NOTE: The Foot Rest is secured in position on the front of the system, between the wheelbase: Foot Rest…
Page 716
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-7-1 Foot Rest Replacement Procedure (cont’d) Bolt Hinge Securing Pin Slide hinge in this direction Figure 8-239 Bolt Hinge Securing Foot Rest to Wheelbase 2.) Release the other side of the foot rest from the securing pin on the left side — see Figure 8-239.
Page 717
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-7-2 Brake and Swivel Locking Wheels Replacement Procedure NOTE: The procedure below is the same whether replacing a Brake Locking Wheel (Front Wheel: P/N S2420671) or a Swivel Locking Wheel (Rear Wheel: P/N S2420672).
Page 718
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-7-2-4 Brake and Swivel Locking Wheels Installation Procedure 1) Carefully lift the chassis sufficiently to allow insertion of the replacement wheel shaft into the wheel securing socket.
Page 719
Use the appropriate flat and Phillips-type screwdrivers as indicated in the Lower Arm replacement procedure. 8-7-3-2 Preparations Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-7-3-3 Lower Arm Removal Procedure 1) Working from the front of the system, raise the console to the maximum up position.
Page 720
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-7-3 Lower Arm Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 4.) While moving the keyboard slightly up and down with one hand, use the screwdriver to push the securing pin all the way out of the base of the operator panel, as shown in Figure 8-243 below.,…
Page 721
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6) Lower the arm to access the lower securing pins as shown in Figure 8-245 and remove the securing clips on either side of the lower arm.
Page 722
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 10) Remove the Lower Arm from the system, as shown in Figure 8-247. Figure 8-247 Removing the Lower Arm 8-7-3-4 Lower Arm Installation Procedure NOTE:…
Page 723
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 5) Lower the console and raise the Lower Arm to insert the upper support pin previously removed Figure 8-248. Figure 8-248 Raising Lower Arm to Reconnect with Upper Arm (Console not shown) 6.) While moving the console slightly up and down with one hand, insert the securing pin (previously removed) — refer to…
Page 724
8-7-4-1 Tools Use the appropriate flat and Phillips type screwdrivers and the appropriate Allen keys. 8-7-4-2 Preparation Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-7-4-3…
Page 725
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 6.) Using an Allen key, unscrew each locking screw on either side of the support arm — Figure 8-250. Figure 8-250 Releasing the Securing Screws on Either Side of the Support Arm 7.) Tap out the internal supporting pin using a screwdriver — Figure…
Page 726
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8.) Similarly, remove the upper gas spring securing pin and use a screwdriver to support the joint — Figure 8-252.
Page 727
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-7-4-4 Gas Spring Installation Procedure NOTE: The gas spring is supplied without the top connecting bracket — see Figure 8-253.
Page 728
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL shown in Figure 8-254. 7.) Applying Loctite, insert the first locking screw previously removed and screw it in until it just touches the supporting pin.
Page 729
Tools Use the appropriate Allen key as indicated in the Probe Cable Holder replacement procedure. 8-7-5-2 Preparations Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-7-5-3 Probe Cable Holder Removal Procedure 1) Raise the console to the maximum up position.
Page 730
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-7-5-4-1 Routing the Probe Cables When routing the probe cables, it is important to lead the cables upwards from the system’s connecting ports as shown in Figure 8-256.
Page 731
Figure 8-259. Figure 8-259 AC Power Cable Connected and Routed NOTE: Whenever moving the Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N scanner, make sure the system is prepared correctly, as shown in Figure 8-260 on page 8-206. Chapter 8 — Replacement Procedures…
Page 732
Figure 8-260, with the monitor screen folded downwards. Figure 8-260 Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N Scanner and Cables — Ready for Moving 7.) Turn ON power to the system. 8.) Check for proper up/down and side-to-side movement of the operator panel and monitor, as described in “Mechanical Functional Tests”…
Page 733: Software Loading

The PMC software is automatically updated with the system upgrade. NOTE: It is essential to back-up the archive and the settings as described in the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N User Manual, before commencing software installation (or whenever upgrading the software).
Page 734
Software Upgrade Procedure Overview (cont’d) IMPORTANT Before performing a Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N Software Upgrade from Version BT11 to NOTICE BT12, it is mandatory to backup the Archive, then format and partition the Hard Disk (due to partitioning changes).
Page 735
At the site, perform the following steps before you start the upgrade procedure: 1.) Perform Disk Management for all database records and select the “Copy” option (for instructions, refer to the Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N User Manual on your document media). NOTE: It is recommended that Disk Management be executed using the “move”…
Page 736
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-8-2 Preparation (cont’d) Modifying BIOS Settings prior to Software Installation NOTE: This preparation procedure is required to enable system reboot from the USB Flash Drive containing the system software.
Page 737
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-8-2 Preparation (cont’d) 4.) Under Advanced, select Display Control, then press <Enter>. Figure 8-262 Changing Display Control Mode 5.) From the available options, change the Display Mode to CRT+LCD. Figure 8-263 Display Mode — CRT+LCD 6.) Check that Flat Panel Type is set to SVGA.
Page 738
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-8-2 Preparation (cont’d) 7.) Click the Exit menu and select Exit Saving Changes. 8.) When prompted, click Yes to confirm and exit. Figure 8-265 Exiting BIOS Settings and Saving Changes 9.) Return to step 5…
Page 739
NOTE: The following upgrade procedure is based on the Vivid S6 N system. The procedure is the same for the Vivid S5 N system (displayed screens will of course reflect Vivid S5 N information). NOTE: During the software installation procedure, it is important to observe the USB Flash Drive connected to the front of the Operator Panel and make sure the LED is blinking.
Page 740
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 8-2 Step-by-Step Software Upgrade/Installation/Reinstallation Procedure (cont’d) 2 of 9 Step Instruction Expected Result Proceed with the Software Installation process by File loading starts.
Page 741
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 8-2 Step-by-Step Software Upgrade/Installation/Reinstallation Procedure (cont’d) 3 of 9 Step Instruction Expected Result Press [Yes] or [No], as applicable. The message window closes;…
Page 742
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 8-2 Step-by-Step Software Upgrade/Installation/Reinstallation Procedure (cont’d) 4 of 9 Step Instruction Expected Result When all files have been copied, the following options are displayed: Select the following option: The following Warning message is displayed: Reboot Machine…
Page 743
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 8-2 Step-by-Step Software Upgrade/Installation/Reinstallation Procedure (cont’d) 5 of 9 Step Instruction Expected Result IMPORTANT. The system reboots and then begins the software installation process. Perform these steps before proceeding! This stage of the process takes approximately 20 minutes, during which time a progress indicator is displayed, as shown in the example below:…
Page 744
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 8-2 Step-by-Step Software Upgrade/Installation/Reinstallation Procedure (cont’d) 6 of 9 Step Instruction Expected Result The system automatically reboots, then displays the following screens 8-218 Section 8-8 — Software Loading…
Page 745
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 8-2 Step-by-Step Software Upgrade/Installation/Reinstallation Procedure (cont’d) 7 of 9 Step Instruction Expected Result Note: The last screen shown on the right is displayed for a long time.
Page 746
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 8-2 Step-by-Step Software Upgrade/Installation/Reinstallation Procedure (cont’d) 8 of 9 Step Instruction Expected Result At the end of the software installation, the Software License dialog box appears. Type in the option key that you received from the OTR The system will boot-up into Normal scanning mode.
Page 747
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 8-2 Step-by-Step Software Upgrade/Installation/Reinstallation Procedure (cont’d) 9 of 9 Step Instruction Expected Result Verify the Application Software version corresponds with the System Software version you have installed (check against the label on the USB Flash Drive) and that it was correctly installed.
Page 748
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-8-4 Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N Software Re-Installation Procedure Table 8-3 Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N Software Re-Installation Step Instruction Expected Result…
Page 749
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 8-3 Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N Software Re-Installation (cont’d) Step Instruction Expected Result When prompted, type the following password: A message is displayed showing the current system ID;…
Page 750
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 8-3 Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N Software Re-Installation (cont’d) Step Instruction Expected Result Press any key to begin the PMC upgrade. The PMC upgrade commences and the following screen with current PMC version and colored progress bar is displayed: When done (after several minutes), the screen will turn blank and the fans will…
Page 751
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 8-3 Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N Software Re-Installation (cont’d) Step Instruction Expected Result Navigate to the TCPIP tab and press the Set button on Connectivity dialog box — TCPIP tab activated: the control panel.
Page 752
NOTE: This procedure is valid for Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N systems running BT12 software later than Build 31. As described in the procedure below, it is not necessary to reinstall the software since the option is provided to load only the latest version of the User Manuals (in all languages).
Page 753
FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 8-4 Loading Latest Version Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N User Manuals(cont’d) Step Instruction Expected Result Select the following option: The following message is displayed: Update User Manual) then press <Enter>.
Page 754
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-8-6 Setting the BIOS NOTE: This procedure is applicable to MODBR964 version. NOTE: To reset the BIOS password, one can remove the real time battery for a period longer than 10 secs, then reconnect it.
Page 755
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 12) Perform the following changes in the <Boot>: Option Value Comments BootATX AC Power Boot Mode Desktop BootBoot Device Priority Boot Boot Device Priority 1 — st Boot device Highlight CDROM Drive, Hold CDROM Drive…
Page 756
8-8-7 Formatting and Partitioning the Hard Disk — Automatic Procedure NOTE: This procedure is applicable to Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N systems running software version BT12. Table 8-5 Formatting and Partitioning the Hard Disk — Automatic Procedure Step…
Page 757
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 8-5 Formatting and Partitioning the Hard Disk — Automatic Procedure Step Instruction Expected Result Press [Y] to confirm the Hard Disk formatting command. Hard Disk formatting commences. During this process, a visual indication of progress is displayed on the screen: When Hard Disk formatting is complete, the system automatically reboots.
Page 758
1.) Boot up the system into Maintenance mode and exit to the Windows desktop. 2.) Insert the Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N KB Firmware software disk (P/N 5402933) into the DVD drive. 3.) Navigate to My Computer, drive I: .
Page 759
IMPORTANT: Contact the customer and request that a full incremental back-up be performed prior to NOTICE upgrade. If necessary, refer them to the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N User Manual. Ask for removal (delete) of un-necessary patient information, so that the back-up process will require minimal time.
Page 760: Peripherals — Replacement Procedures

P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 8-9 Peripherals — Replacement Procedures 8-9-1 Wireless USB Network Adaptor Replacement Procedure NOTE: This section describes removal and replacement procedures only. For initial installation and configuration instructions, refer to the information provided in Chapter 3 — System Setup.
Page 761
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-9-1 Wireless USB Network Adaptor Replacement Procedure (cont’d) USB Connector Wireless Network Adaptor Figure 8-268 Wireless USB Network Adaptor Connected to Rear of Scanner 8-9-1-5 Wireless USB Network Adaptor Installation Procedure 1.) Place the Wireless USB Network Adaptor against the rear of the system with the velcro facing…
Page 762
4-7. 8-9-2-4 DVD/CD-RW Drive Removal Procedure 1) Remove the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N left and right side covers, as described in the “Left Side Cover Removal Procedure” on page 8-6 “Right Side Cover Removal Procedure” on page 8-5.
Page 763
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-9-2 DVD/CD-RW Drive Replacement Procedure (cont’d) 6.) Disconnect the DVD USB cable and the DVD power cable from the rear of the DVD /CD-RW Drive, as indicated in Figure 8-270.
Page 764
USB port on the chassis i.e. the port that was previously occupied by the old DVD/ CD cable. 2.) Connect the new DVD cable as follows: 3.) Plug the D-type connector into its connector on the Vivid S5 N/Vivid S6 Nchassis — see Figure 8-272.
Page 765
“Front Cover Installation Procedure” on page 8-19. 9.) Return the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N left and right side covers, as described in the “Left Side Cover Installation Procedure” on page 8-7 “Right Side Cover Installation Procedure” on page 8-5.
Page 766
8-9-3-5 MOD Drive Installation Procedure 1.) Place the MOD Drive either on the tray at the rear of the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N scanner, or on a flat, stable surface close to the scanner. 2.) Using the power cable (provided with the MOD Drive), connect one end to the power IN socket at rear of the MOD Drive and the other to one of the peripheral power outlets at the rear of the scanner.
Page 767
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 3.) Connect the USB cable between the USB port at the rear of the MOD Drive and either of the USB ports (upper or lower) on the scanner rear connectors panel.
Page 768
Figure 8-277 on page 8-243. 2) Disconnect the power cable from the mains power outlet. 3) Disconnect the External USB Hard Disk from the USB port on the Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N system. 4) Remove the unit. NOTE: If the External USB Hard Disk is filled with data, store it in a safe place and label it with the date, and a note that the drive is full.
Page 769
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL External USB Hard Disk — Rear View Power IN Cable Power OUT Cable AC/DC Power Converter and Cables Figure 8-277 External USB Hard Disk — Rear View and Cables IN THE EVENT THAT THE AC/DC POWER CONVERTER AND CABLES HAVE BEEN WARNING WARNING…
Page 770
NOTE: Only connect one USB storage device (like this External USB Hard Disk) to the Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N scanner at a time. Follow these steps to set the Volume Name: 1) Connect the USB cable from the External USB Hard Disk to a laptop or PC.
Page 771
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 8-279 Removable Disk Shown under My Computer 4) Right-click the drive name (Removable Disk) and select Rename from the menu. Figure 8-280 Select Rename from the Drop-down Menu 5) Enter the name you have decided to use for the drive.
Page 772
Connecting the External USB Hard Disk to the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N Scanner 1) Connect the USB cable to a USB port on the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N scanner. 2.) Turn ON power to the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound scanner.
Page 773
4-7. 8-9-5-4 Black and White Printer Removal Procedure 1) Remove the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N left and right side covers, as described in the “Left Side Cover Removal Procedure” on page 8-6 “Right Side Cover Removal Procedure” on page 8-5.
Page 774
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-9-5 Black and White Printer Replacement Procedure (cont’d) Screws this side not visible in illustration Black and White Printer Figure 8-283 Screws Securing Black and White Printer in Compartment 5.) Using a small screwdriver, release the metal securing plate and slide it out of the compartment, as shown in…
Page 775
“Front Cover Installation Procedure” on page 8-19. 7) Return the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N left and right side covers, as described in the “Left Side Cover Installation Procedure” on page 8-7 “Right Side Cover Installation Procedure” on page 8-5.
Page 776
4-7. 8-9-6-4 Peripherals Console Removal Procedure 1) Remove the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N left and right side covers, as described in the “Left Side Cover Removal Procedure” on page 8-6 “Right Side Cover Removal Procedure” on page 8-5.
Page 777
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 8-9-6-5 Peripherals Console Installation Procedure 1. Remove the DVD/CD-RW drive securing bracket from the new peripherals console as shown in Figure 8-287.
Page 778
“DVD/CD-RW Installation Procedure” on page 8-238. 6) Return the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N left and right rear covers, as described in the “Left Rear Cover Installation Procedure” on page 8-16 “Right Rear Cover Installation Procedure” on page 8-12 7) Return the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N front cover, as described in the “Front Cover Installation…
Page 779
None 8-9-7-2 Time Required 20 minutes 8-9-7-3 Preparations Shut down the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound unit, as described in 4-2-3 «Power Shut Down» on page 4-7. 8-9-7-4 Digital Color Printer Removal Procedure 1.) Disconnect the USB cable from the scanner rear connectors panel, and from the USB port at the rear of the printer.
Page 780
Digital Color Printer Installation Procedure 1.) Place the Digital Color Printer on a stable surface close to the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N scanner. 2.) Using the power cable (provided with the printer), connect one end of the power cable to the power IN socket at rear of the printer, and the other end to the printer peripherals outlet at the rear of the scanner.
Page 781
1.) Place the DeskJet Color Printer on a stable surface close to the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N scanner. 2.) Using the AC adaptor and power cable (provided with the printer), connect one end of the power…
Page 782
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Figure 8-291 DeskJet Color Printer — Rear View 3.) Connect the USB cable between the USB port at the rear of the printer (Figure 8-291) and either of the USB ports (upper or lower) on the scanner rear connectors panel.
Page 783
Chapter 9 Renewal Parts Section 9-1 Overview 9-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 9 This chapter gives you an overview of replacement parts for the Vivid S5 N and Vivid S6 N ultrasound scanner. Table 9-1 Contents in Chapter 9 Section Description…
Page 784
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 9-2 List of Abbreviations • Assy — Assembly • — Back End Processor • — Customer Replaceable Unit •…
Page 785
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 9-3 Covers Figure 9-1 Covers — Diagram 1 Table 9-2 Covers — Diagram 1 Item Part Name Part Number Description Cover: Bottom rear.
Page 786
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 9-3 Covers (cont’d) 114 115 Not shown 118 119 here Not shown here Figure 9-2 Covers — Diagram 2 Table 9-3 Covers — Diagram 2 Item Part Name…
Page 787
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 9-4 Mechanical Hardware Parts Figure 9-3 Mechanical Hardware Parts — Diagram 1 Table 9-4 Mechanical Hardware Parts — Diagram 1 Item Part Name Part Number…
Page 788
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 9-4 Mechanical Hardware Parts (cont’d) NOT USED Rear Wheel Front Wheel Figure 9-4 Mechanical Hardware Parts — Diagram 2 Table 9-5 Mechanical Hardware Parts — Diagram 2 Item Part Name…
Page 789
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 9-5 Electro Mechanical Parts Not shown here. Figure 9-5 Electro Mechanical Parts — Diagram 1 Table 9-6 Electronic Parts — Diagram 1 Item Part Name Part Number…
Page 790
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 9-6 Electronic Parts Figure 9-6 Electronic Parts — Diagram 1 Table 9-7 Electronic Parts — Diagram 1 Item Part Name Part Number Description…
Page 791
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 9-6 Electronic Parts (cont’d) TR32 Board Heat Sink Pad Figure 9-7 Electronic Parts — Diagram 2 Table 9-8 Electronic Parts — Diagram 2 Item Part Name Part Number…
Page 792
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 9-6 Electronic Parts (cont’d) 701 702 Not shown here Figure 9-8 Electronic Parts — Diagram 3 Table 9-9 Electronic Parts — Diagram 3 Item Part Name Part Number…
Page 793
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 9-7 Cables Table 9-10 Cables Item Part Name Part Number Description 1001 Cable: RFI to BEP flex S2418578 1002 Cable: BEP to Bridge S2420879…
Page 794
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 9-10 Cables (cont’d) Item Part Name Part Number Description Cable: B&W Printer USB to 1006 S2419132 Distribution 1007 Cable: BEP LAN to DIB S2419055 1008…
Page 795
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 9-10 Cables (cont’d) Item Part Name Part Number Description 1011 Cable: Internal ECG S2419034-2 1012 Cable: KB Data to Distribution S2419653 1013 Cable: Monitor DVI to Distribution…
Page 796
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 9-10 Cables (cont’d) Item Part Name Part Number Description Cable: Yellow Lead Europe & 1119 S2269983 Cable: Black Lead Europe & 1120 S2269983-2 1121…
Page 797
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 9-8 Software Table 9-11 Software Item Part Name Part Number Description Vivid S5N and Vivid S6 N Software and 1301 N5444462 SW and Doc disk on key (BT12)
Page 798
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 9-9 Probes Table 9-12 Probes 1 of 2 Item Part Name Part Number Description 2355686 1471 Probe: 3S — RS H4000PD 47237516 1472…
Page 799
Probe: e8C — RS H40402LN 5116678 1490 Probe: i12L RS H40402LW 1491 PROBE RELEASE ARM CAP KIT S2422766 GE M4S/3S Probe Sterile Multi- 1492 E8385MZ Angle Biopsy Starter Kit 1493 3Sc-RS Biopsy Kit H45041FX 1494 4C — RS Biopsy Kit…
Page 800
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 9-10 Peripherals Table 9-13 Approved Peripherals Item Part Name Part Number Description 1501 DVD/CD-RW S2423870 Sony UP-D898MD Digital A6 BW 1502 5555265 Printer…
Page 801
This chapter describes the Care and Maintenance (PM) procedures for the Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N Ultrasound system and its peripherals. These procedures are designed to protect your investment in the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N system, and are intended to maintain the quality of system performance.
Page 802
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 10-1-3 Warnings THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES INSIDE THE CAGE, THE BATTERY, DANGER THE AC DISTRIBUTION BOX, AND THE DISTRIBUTION INTERFACE BOARD (DIB) THAT COULD BE DANGEROUS.
Page 803
Your GE HEALTHCARE Service Representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for a Quality Assurance program. Please contact us for details of your nearest GE HEALTHCARE Service Representative, who will provide a quotation for this service, as required.
Page 804
It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the Care and Maintenance procedures are performed on the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N ultrasound scanner as scheduled in order to retain the high levels of safety, dependability, and system performance.
Page 805
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 10-2 Customer Care & Maintenance Task Schedule Service at Indicated Time Daily Weekly Monthly Annually Notes • Clean Probes •…
Page 806
ERVICE ANUAL Section 10-4 System Maintenance 10-4-1 Preliminary Checks The preliminary checks take approximately 15 minutes to perform. Refer to the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N User Manual whenever necessary. Table 10-3 System Preliminary Checks Item Description Ask & Listen Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment.
Page 807
EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 10-4-2 Functional Checks The functional checks take approximately 60 minutes to perform. Refer to the Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N User Manual whenever necessary. NOTE: Refer also to Chapter 4 — Functional Checks, for additional details about the functional checks described in this section.
Page 808
Peripheral/Option Checks If any peripherals or options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted. Refer to the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N User Manual for a list of approved peripherals/options. Table 10-5 GE Approved Peripheral/Hardware Option Functional Checks…
Page 809
Table 10-7 on page 10-10. • Do not use any solutions or products not listed in the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N User Manual. • Do not spray any liquid directly onto the system covers, LCD Display or keyboard! •…
Page 810
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Table 10-7 Vivid™ S5 N and Vivid™ S6 N Systems — General Cleaning Step Item Description Covers On a weekly basis, moisten a soft, non-abrasive folded cloth or sponge with a mild, general purpose, non-abrasive soap and water solution.
Page 811
10-4-4-2 Air Filter Cleaning Regular cleaning of the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N scanner’s air filter will ensure that the filter does not become clogged — this would otherwise cause the system to overheat and reduce system performance and reliability.
Page 812
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 10-4-4-3 Mechanical Trackball Cleaning NOTE: The Trackball ring serves as a dust cover. 1.) Turn the trackball ring to loosen and remove it. Trackball ring 2.) Lift out the trackball.
Page 813
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 10-4-5 Physical Inspection Table 10-9 Physical Checks Step Item Description Labeling Verify that all system labeling is present and in readable condition. Scratches and Dents Inspect the system for dents, scratches or cracks.
Page 814
7-108. (Vivid S6 N systems) Observe all warnings and cautions for battery handling, recharging, storing, and/or disposal, as listed in “Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N Battery Safety” on page 1-14. 10-4-6 Optional Diagnostic Checks To complete the periodic maintenance checks, perform the diagnostic tests as described in Chapter 7 — Diagnostics/Troubleshooting.
Page 815
WARNING IMPROPER HANDLING MAY EASILY DAMAGE ULTRASOUND PROBES. SEE THE Vivid S5 N / Vivid S6 N USER MANUAL AND ALSO REFER TO THE PROBE MANUFACTURER’S HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS, FOR MORE DETAILS. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
Page 816
10-5-4-1 Basic Probe Cleaning NOTE: For details on general probe cleaning, refer to the information provided in the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N User Manual. NOTE: For specific probe cleaning instructions, refer to the individual probe Users Manual (or care card supplied with the probe).
Page 817
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 10-5-4-2 General Probe Cleaning Instructions Do not clean or immerse probes using any of the following products: WARNING WARNING •…
Page 818
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 10-5-4-2 General Probe Cleaning Instructions (cont’d) 10-5-4-2-1 Cleaning and Sterilizing Probes Used Externally Table 10-11 Cleaning & Sterilizing Procedure for Probes Used Externally Step Description To protect yourself from blood-borne diseases, wear approved, non-allergic disposable gloves.
Page 819
Equipment being returned must be properly clean and free of blood and other potentially infectious contaminants. GE policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GE employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment.
Page 820
PERFORMED SAFETY TESTS E.G. LAST YEAR ETC. IN EVENT OF UNEXPLAINABLE ABRUPT CHANGES OF SAFETY-TEST RESULTS, CONSULT EXPERIENCED AUTHORIZED SERVICE PERSONNEL OR GE FOR FURTHER ANALYSIS. To avoid the risk of electrical shock, the unit under test must not be connected to other electrical CAUTION equipment.
Page 821
The following limits are summarized for NFPA 99 (for USA) and IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards. These limits are GE standards and in some cases are lower than the above standards listed. Table 10-13 Chassis Current Leakage Limits — Accessible Metal Surfaces…
Page 822
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 10-6-3 Outlet Test Wiring Arrangement — USA & Canada Test all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet tester and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated.
Page 823
2.) Connect one of the Ohmmeter probes to the tested AC wall outlet (Ground pin). 3.) Using the other Ohmmeter probe, touch the exposed metal part of the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N unit. 4) Set the meter Function switch to the Resistance position.
Page 824
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 10-6-5 Chassis Current Leakage Test 10-6-5-1 Definition This test measures the current that would flow in a grounded person who touched accessible metal parts of the bedside station, if the Ground wire should break.
Page 825
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 10-6-5-3 Data Sheet for Chassis Source Current Leakage The Chassis Source Current Leakage Test passes when all readings measure less than the values shown Table 10-13.
Page 826
Measurements should be made with the Ground Open and Closed, with power line polarity Normal and Reversed, and with the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N unit ON and OFF. For each combination, the operating controls (such as, the lead switch) should be operated to find the worst case condition.
Page 827
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 10-6-7 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage – Lead-to-Lead NOTE: Refer to the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. 10-6-8 Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage — Isolation Test NOTE: Refer to the procedure in the IEC 60601-1.
Page 828
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 10-6-8-1 Data Sheet for ECG Current Leakage The test passes when all readings measure less than the values shown in the tables below. Table 10-17 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Lead Leakage Test to Ground Maximum Allowance Limit…
Page 829
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 10-6-9 Probe Current Leakage Test 10-6-9-1 Definition This test measures the current that would flow to Ground (from any of the probes) through a patient who is being scanned, and who becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface.
Page 830
Figure 10-6 Check Without Probe Adapter Follow these steps to test each transducer for current leakage. 1.) Turn the Vivid S5 N or Vivid S6 N unit OFF. 2.) Plug the unit into the test meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet.
Page 831
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL 10-6-9-4 Data Sheet for Transducer Source Current Leakage The test passes when all readings measure less than the values shown in Table 10-14 Table 10-15.
Page 832
P R E L I M I N A R Y FN091065, R VS5 N VS6 N UMBER EVISION ERVICE ANUAL Section 10-7 Excessive Current Leakage 10-7-1 Possible Causes of Excessive Current Leakage 10-7-1-1 Chassis Fails Check the Ground on the power cord and plug for continuity. Ensure the Ground is not broken, frayed, or intermittent.
Page 834
2013 and 2015, General Electric Company. © GE Vingmed Ultrasound AS P.O.Box: 141 NO 3191 HORTEN NORWAY www.gehealthcare.com…

Источник

Vivid S5 — представляет собой новое поколение ультразвуковых систем для сердечно-сосудистых исследований с концептуально новым дизайном: с одной стороны, это повышенная миниатюризация, которой удалось добиться благодаря использованию опыта проектирования портативного сканера Vivid i, а с другой стороны, опыт создания аппарата экспертного класса Vivid 7, позволил обеспечить новинку высокой производительностью.

Сердцевиной системы Vivid S5 является высокое качество изображения и широкая функциональность. Добавьте к этому поддержку новейших технологий и выдающийся эргономичный дизайн, и вы получите систему, которая готова обслуживать широкий круг клинических задач. При этом невысокая цена является ещё одним существенным достоинством данной модели.

Передовые возможности, высокий уровень эргономики сканера позволяют сконцентрировать своё внимание исключительно на пациенте, а не системе.

Сохранение и архивация в виде сырых данных, обеспечивает сохранность оригинального качество изображений. Рабочая станция EchoPAC PC™ позволяет получить мгновенный доступ к сырым ультразвуковым данным системы Vivid S5 для всеобъемлющего анализа и пост-обработки изображений. Кроме этого расширенные сетевые возможности сканера и поддержка различных носителей информации, обеспечивают беспрепятственный и комфортный обмен данными.

Принципиально новый эргономичный дизайн Vivid S5 снижает усталость и дискомфорт, позволяя повысить эффективность работы.

Клавиша FLEX, расположенная на клавиатуре рядом с трекболом, позволяет назначить себе функции другой, более отдаленной клавиши, минимизируя усилия оператора и повышая скорость работы и простоту использования.

Возможность перехода в спящий режим работы для экономии энергии, многочисленный набор возможных датчиков добавить Vivid S5 ещё больше повышают удобство использования системы.

Flex-Fit механизм обеспечивает свободное и плавное позиционирование панели управления в пространстве (вверх и вниз, от себя и к себе), позволяя с легкостью выбирать оптимальное положение для вашего удобства, предоставляя необходимое для комфортной работы свободное место для ног, независимо от того стоите ли вы или Cистема ультразвуковая диагностическая медицинская Vivid S сидите. Также свободно перемещаемая в горизонтальной плоскости клавиатура, гарантирует легкую досягаемость.

Благодаря своей компактности сканер легко вписывается в ограниченное пространство, при этом обеспечивается уровень производительности более крупных консолей. Малый вес и небольшие размеры, механизм парковки монитора (монитор может быть полностью сложен вниз для лучшего обзора при транспортировке) дают системе повышенную мобильность.

Области применения

Кардиология;
Сосудистые исследования;
Транскраниальные исследования сосудов головного мозга;
Абдоминальные исследования;
Акушерство и гинекология;
Урология;
Педиатрия и неонатология;
Исследования поверхностных органов и структур.

Основные характеристики системы

Полная поддержка архитектуры TrueScan.
Автоматическая оптимизация изображения и спектра (ATO, ASO) нажатием одной кнопки.
Технология Smart Depth автоматически устанавливает необходимую частоту, выполняет фокусировку и настраивает другие внутренние параметры системы в зависимости от глубины сканирования.
Экспертное качество визуализации и высочайшая чувствительность.
Технология ультравысокого временного разрешения.
3 активных порта для подключения датчиков;
Использует высокоплотные мультичастотные широкополосные датчики с новым улучшенным коннектором, включая и чреспищеводные датчики.
Режимы сканирования: 2D, M-режим, анатомический М-режим, цветной М-режим, цветовой допплер, направленный энергетический допплер, импульсно-волновой (HPRF) допплер, непрерывно-волновой допплер, спектральный тканевой допплер.
Триплексный режим отображения в реальном времени.
Встроенная компьютерная рабочая станция для архивации и постпроцессинговой обработки полученных данных.
15-ти дюймовый ЖК-монитор обеспечивает превосходную видимость под разными углами просмотра и высочайшее качество изображения.
Открытая архитектура системы позволяет использовать одновременно до 2048 приемо-передающих каналов.
Прямое подключение к рабочей станции

№ п/п	Наименование параметров, функций	Величина параметра, наличие функции
	Универсальная цветовая ультразвуковая диагностическая система с полностью цифровой программируемой архитектурой с возможностями работы с высокой частотой кадров для проведения ультразвуковых исследований сердца, сосудов и внутренних органов взрослых и детей с высокой диагностической точностью.	Соответствие
1	Области применения	— кардиология; — ангиология; — транскраниальные исследования структур и сосудов головного мозга; — близко расположенные органы и поверхностные структуры; — органы брюшной полости; — акушерство; — гинекология; — скелетно-мышечная система; — урология; — педиатрия; — неонатология; — интраоперационные исследования
2	Операционная система	Наличие
3	Программное обеспечение	На русском языке
4	Формирование ультразвукового луча	Полностью цифровое
5	Технология широкополосного формирования ультразвукового луча	Наличие
6	12-бит A/D конвертеры на физический канал	Наличие
7	Количество приемо-передающих каналов	Не менее 24 500
8	Параллельная обработка данных по 4 каналам	Наличие
9	Динамический диапазон	Не менее 210 дБ
10	Многочастотное сканирование с возможностью выбора центральной частоты	В диапазоне не уже чем от 1,5 до 13,3 МГц
11	Переключение частот между режимами 2D, цветового допплера и спектрального допплера	Независимое
12	Динамическая аподизация	Наличие
13	Динамическая апертура	Наличие
14	Динамическая фокусировка	Наличие
15	Минимальное количество зон фокусировки	Не менее 4
16	Многолучевое сложносоставное сканирование (лучевой компаундинг)	Наличие
17	Интеллектуальные тканеспецифичные программы	Наличие
18	Количество отображаемых градаций серого	Не менее 256
19	Технология кодированного излучения	Наличие
20	Динамическая оптимизация изображения на основе анализа типов тканей в поле изображения.	Автоматическая
21	Технология кодированной тканевой гармоники	Третьего поколения
22	Количество базовых частот	Не менее 4
23	Количество гармонических частот	Не менее 5
24	Режимы сканирования	— В-режим; — М-режим; — импульсно-волновой допплер ; — постоянно-волновой допплер ; — CFM — цветовое допплеровское картирование по скорости; — цветовое допплеровское картирование по энергии; — недопплеровская цифровая технология точной визуализации потока крови в сосудах в реальном масштабе времени; — недопплеровское цветовое кодирование направления потока крови в сосудах в реальном масштабе времени; — триплексный режим в реальном масштабе времени; — спектральный тканевой допплер; — режим цветового тканевого допплера в реальном масштабе времени; — автоматическая оценка амплитуды смещения миокарда в реальном масштабе времени; — программа автоматического и ручного анализа сохраненных кинопетель; — режим автоматической недопплеровской количественной оценки глобальной сократительной функции левого желудочка; — режим СтрессЭхоКГ
25	Параметры и характеристики В-режима	— угловое смещение изображения; — количество зон фокусировки – не менее 4-х; — максимальная глубина сканирования, не менее 30 см; — максимальная частота кадров, не менее 750 кадров в сек.; — композитное изображение; — функция улучшения пространственного разрешения изображения в регионе Zoom; — технология «пересекающихся лучей»; — технология автоматического подавления артефактов; — технология двойного фокуса на секторных датчиках; — технология автоматической оптимизации 2D-изображения; технология «виртуальной верхушки», расширение ближнего поля визуализации на секторном датчике; — технология непрерывной оптимизации поперечной и радиальной равномерности изображения, а также яркости изображения ткани
26	Параметры и характеристики М-режима	— цветовой М-режим; — анатомический линейный М-режим в реальном масштабе времени; — анатомический нелинейный М-режим в реальном масштабе времени; — активация анатомического М-режимов на сохраненных кинопетлях; — свмещение с режимами цветового допплера, тканевого цветового допплера и стресс-эхо
27	Параметры и характеристики режима «импульсно-волновой допплер»	— коррекция угла, в диапазоне не уже +/80 гр.; — коррекция угла с шагом не более 1°; — размер контрольного объема в диапазоне не уже чем от 1 до 15 мм; — режим HPRF PW; — PRF в диапазоне В диапазоне не уже чем от 250 Гц до 19,5 кГц; — минимальная регистрируемая скорость PW не более 0,01 м/с; — максимальная регистрируемая скорость PW не менее 31 м/с; — максимальная глубина расположения контрольного объема не менее 30 см; — независимая коррекция частоты допплера; — автоматическое оконтуривание доплеровского спектра в режиме реального времени и в режиме последующей обработки
28	Параметры и характеристики режима «постоянно-волновой допплер»	— независимая коррекция частоты допплера; — минимальная регистрируемая скорость CW не более 0,01 м/c; — максимальная регистрируемая скорость CW не менее 50 м/с
29	Параметры и характеристики режима «CFM — цветовое допплеровское картирование по скорости»	— алгоритм подавления артефактов, возникающих при движении и дыхании; — автоматическая привязка зоны фокусировки к окну зоны интереса цветового допплера; — независимое от В-режима изменение частоты сканирования; — максимальная частота кадров не менее 300 кадров в секунду
30	Параметры и характеристики режима «цветовое допплеровское картирование по энергии»	— алгоритм подавления артефактов, возникающих при движении и дыхании; — автоматическая привязка зоны фокусировки к окну зоны интереса цветового допплера
31	Параметры и характеристики режима «недопплеровская цифровая технология точной визуализации потока крови»	Недопплеровское цветовое кодирование направления потока крови в сосудах в реальном масштабе времени
32	Параметры и характеристики режима «триплексный режим в реальном масштабе времени»	— В+CFM+PW; — B+PD+PW; — выведение до пяти физиологических кривых на экран монитора; — технология автоматической адаптации параметров сканирования при изменении глубины сканирования
33	Параметры и характеристики режима « режим цветового тканевого допплера в реальном масштабе времени»	— Работа в «теневом» режиме; — алгоритм подавления артефактов, возникающих при движении и дыхании; — автоматическая привязка зоны фокусировки к окну зоны интереса цветового допплера; — независимое от В режима изменение частоты сканирования; — комбинированное использование с анатомическим М-режимом (линейным и нелинейным) в режиме реального времени и в режиме последующей обработки; — максимальная частота кадров
34	Параметры и характеристики режима «автоматическая оценка амплитуды смещения миокарда»	Кодирование цветом амплитуды смещения миокарда в реальном масштабе времени цветом
35	Параметры и характеристики режима «режим автоматической недопплеровской количественной оценки глобальной сократительной функции левого желудочка, рассчитанной по формуле Симпсона»	— Автоматическое оконтуривание полости левого желудочка; — автоматический расчет частоты сердечного ритма, фракции выброса ЛЖ, минутного объема сердца, ударного объема ЛЖ
36	Автоматическая оптимизация изображения в В-режиме	По акустическим свойствам тканей
37	Автоматическая оптимизация допплеровского спектра	— Автоматическая корректировка базовой линии; — автоматическая корректировка шкалы
38	Количество выводимых на экран синхронизированных изображений	Не менее 12
39	Технология автоматического оконтуривания комплекса интима – медия и вычисления его средней толщины, диапазона толщин и стандартного отклонения измерений	Наличие
40	Панорамное сканирование	Наличие
41	Технология виртуального конвекса, конусовидное расширение дистального поля при работе с линейным датчиком	Наличие
42	Модуль программ для улучшения диагностической точности исследований сердца с использованием контрастных веществ	Наличие
43	Запись данных на CD/DVD в формате DICOM 3	Наличие
44	Модуль программ для поддержки формата DICOM в сети и подключения аппарата в DICOM сеть	Наличие
45	Подключение к беспроводной сети	Наличие
46	Компьютерная рабочая станция для архивации и обработки в цифровом виде ультразвуковых изображений и кинопетель	Интегрированная в аппарат
47	Функциональные возможности компьютерной станции	— Создание архивов пациентов, SQL профессиональная база данных; — сохранение изображений и кинопетель в оригинальном качестве, без потерь пространственного и временного разрешения, «сырые» данные; — опция поиска пациента/ов по нескольким заданным критериям — создание групп пациентов, отвечающих определенным критериям; — экспорт исследований на сменные носители CD-R, DVD-R в формате DICOM «сырые» данные; — доступ к ранее сохраненным необработанным «сырым» данным для их дальнейшей обработки; — настройка и регулировка следующих параметров на ранее сохраненных изображениях; — В-режим: усиление, подавление артефактов, выбор цветовой гаммы и карт псевдоокрашивания, отсечение, персистенс; — PW-режим: усиление, изменение угла, смещение базовой линии, выбор скорости прокрутки, выбор формата отображения, цветовой гаммы и карты псевдоокрашивания; — режим кинопетли: активация анатомического М-режима; — автоматическое создание отчетов; — включение в отчеты изображений; — редактор отчетов
48	Проведение измерений и расчетов, сохранение результатов анализа в общую структурированную редактируемую таблицу	Наличие
49	Сохранение изображений и кинопетель в стандартных РС форматах: jpg, avi, mpeg	Наличие
50	Пакеты расчетов и суммарные заключения для кардиологии, взрослой и детской	Наличие
51	Пакеты расчетов и суммарные заключения для ангиологии	Наличие
52	Пакеты расчетов и суммарные заключения для урологии	Наличие
53	Пакеты расчетов и суммарные заключения для исследований почек	Наличие
54	Режим выведения на экран монитора информации о настройках прибора, иконок сохраненных изображений и кинопетель	Наличие
55	Кинопамять	Не менее 300 сек.
56	Регулировка скорости прокрутки кинопетли	Не менее 8 позиций
57	Устройства для сохранения и чтения информации	— Встроенный DVD-RW-дисковод; — встроенный HDD емкостью не менее 160 Гб
58	Интерфейс	— Не менее 2-х USB портов; — видео выход
59	Панель управления	С регулировкой высоты в диапазоне не мене 12 см
60	Интерактивная подсветка клавиатуры	Наличие
61	Встроенная акустическая система	Наличие
62	Полноразмерная алфавитно-цифровая клавиатура	Наличие
63	Держатели для геля и для датчиков с двух сторон	Наличие
64	Программирование пользователем настроек датчиков и приложений	Наличие
65	Программируемые пользователем часто используемые клавиши быстрого доступа	Наличие
66	Монитор	Жидкокристаллический, антибликовый, высокого разрешения с диагональю не менее 17’’
67	Разрешение монитора	Не менее 1280 x 960 пик.
68	Регулировка положения монитора	По вертикали и горизонтали
69	Максимальное количество отображаемых на мониторе цветов	Не менее 17
70	Количество активных портов для подключения датчиков	Не менее 3
71	Модуль ЭКГ	В комплекте с кабелями на 3 отведения
72	Типы датчиков	Многочастотные, широкополосные, высокоплотные электронные датчики
73	Максимальное количество программируемых режимов работы датчиков	Не менее 40 на каждый датчик
74	Секторный фазированный датчик для кардиологии и транскраниальных исследований — Диапазон частот — Число элементов — Угол сканирования	В диапазоне не уже от 1,4 до 4,0 МГц Не менее 64 Не менее 90 гр
75	Конвексный датчик для абдоминальных исследований — Диапазон частот — Число элементов — Угол обзора	В диапазоне не уже от 1,8 до 6,0 МГц Не менее 128 Не менее 58°
76	Линейный датчик для исследования поверхностных органов и структур и периферических сосудов, неонатальных исследований, педиатрии — Диапазон частот — Число элементов — Область визуализации	В диапазоне не уже 6,0 до 13,0 МГц Не менее 128 Не менее 38 мм
77	Термопринтер	Черно-белый

Регистрационный номер медицинского изделия:	ФСЗ 2010/07163
Дата государственной регистрации медицинского изделия:	20.07.2010
Срок действия регистрационного удостоверения:	Бессрочно
Наименование медицинского изделия:	Cистема ультразвуковая диагностическая медицинская Vivid S с принадлежностями (см. Приложение на 5 листах) I. Система ультразвуковая диагностическая медицинская Vivid S варианты исполнения Vivid S5, Vivid S6, состав: 1.Системный блок. 2.Монитор. 3.Кабель электропитания. II. Принадлежности: 1.Датчик секторный фазированный мультичастотный для исследования сердца, сосудов, внутренних органов. 2.Датчик линейный мультичастотный для исследования сердца, сосудов, внутренних органов. 3.Датчик конвексный мультичастотный для исследования сердца, сосудов, внутренних органов. 4.Датчик внутрипослостной мультичастотный для исследования сосудов и внутренних органов 5.Датчик трехмерный мультичастотный для исследования сердца, сосудов, внутренних органов. 6.Датчик интраоперационный мультичастотный для исследования сердца, сосудов, внутренних органов. 7.Датчик карандашный допплеровский для исследования сердца, сосудов, внутренних органов. 8.Датчик секторный фазированный чреспищеводный мультичастотный для исследования сердца, сосудов, внутренних органов. 9.Датчик секторный внутрисердечный мультичастотный для исследования сердца, сосудов, внутренних органов. 10.Датчик внутрисосудистый для исследования сосудов. 11.Коннектор для внутрисердечного датчика. 12.Датчик давления, для исследования пульсовой волны 13.Датчик для фонографии, для исследования шумов сердца. 14.Биопсийная насадка к датчикам. 15.Устройство для хранения, обработки и тестирования чреспищеводных датчиков. 16.Штатив для хранения чреспищеводных датчиков. 17.Адаптер для чреспищеводных датчиков. 18.Адаптер для датчиков. 19.Загубник (взрослый, детский и интраоперационный). 20.Клипса (взрослая, детская и интраоперационная). 21.Прибор для контроля повреждений чреспищеводных датчиков. 22.Латексный стерильный чехол для чреспищеводного датчика. 23.Устройство системного блока для проведения внутрисердечных исследований. 24.Устройство системного блока для проведения чреспищеводных исследований. 25.Устройство системного блока для проведения сосудистых исследований. 26.Устройство системного блока для проведения Стресс ЭхоКГ. 27.Устройство системного блока для проведения тканевого допплера. 28.Устройство системного блока для проведения научно-практических исследований, оценка синхронности сокращения сердца. 29.Устройство системного блока для проведения научно-практических исследований, анализ данных тканевого допплера. 30.Устройство системного блока для проведения контрастных исследований сердца. 31.Устройство системного блока для проведения контрастных исследований сердца, перфузия миокарда. 32.Устройство системного блока для проведения контрастных исследований сосудов и внутренних органов. 33.Устройство системного блока для проведения научно-практических исследований, анализ данных контрастных исследований. 34.Устройство системного блока для проведения научно-практических исследований, оценка региональной функции сердца. 35.Устройство системного блока для проведения научно-практических исследований, оценка деформации миокарда. 36.Устройство системного блока для проведения научно-практических исследований, трехмерная реконструкция сердца. 37.Устройство системного блока для проведения научно-практических исследований, трехмерная реконструкция сосудов и внутренних органов. 38.Устройство системного блока для проведения научно-практических исследований, анализ данных трехмерной реконструкции сердца. 39.Устройство системного блока для проведения научно-практических исследований, автоматическая оценка региональной сократительной функции сердца. 40.Устройство системного блока для проведения научно-практических исследований, автоматическая оценка глобальной сократительной функции сердца. 41.Устройство системного блока для проведения высокоточных сосудистых исследований. 42.Устройство системного блока для автоматической настройки параметров сканера в разных режимах работы. 43.Устройство системного блока для проведения научно-практических исследований, оценка толщины стенки сосуда. 44.Устройство системного блока для проведения научно-практических исследований, панорамного сканирования протяженных объектов. 45.Устройство системного блока для проведения научно-практических исследований, виртуальный конвекс. 46.Устройство системного блока для проведения научных исследований внутренних органов мелких млекопитающих, грызунов. 47.Устройство системного блока для передачи информации в цифровом медицинском формате. 48.Устройство системного блока для управления информацией в цифровом медицинском формате. 49.Устройство системного блока для беспроводной передачи информации. 50.Полка для установки дополнительного оборудования. 51.Тросс-замок. 52.Дополнительный сетевой адаптер. 53.ЭКГ кабель для внешних соединений. 54.Педиатрический ЭКГ кабель. 55.Защитный чехол для сканера. 56.Внешнее зарядное устройство. 57.Устройство бесперебойного питания. 58.Дополнительный аккумулятор. 59.Дополнительные держатели для датчиков. 60.Внешний накопитель информации. 61.Очки стереоскопические. 62.Футляр для очков стереоскопических. 63.Клипса очков стереоскопических. 64.Устройство для записи потоковой цифровой информации, DVD рекордер. 65.Устройство для записи потоковой цифровой информации, МО привод. 66.Устройство для записи цифровой информации на сменные носители, DVD привод. 67.Устройство системного блока для записи цифровой информации на сменные носители, USB. 68.Устройство системного блока для импорта баз данных более ранних версий. 69.Устройство системного блока для передачи информации с включенным просмоторщиком. 70.Устройство системного блока для одновремнной передачи и анализа информации. 71.Устройство системного блока для отсроченной передачи информации. 72.Устройство системного блока для беспроводной передачи информации, системная карта беспроводной передачи данных. 73.Струйное устройство для печати изображений и текстов, принтер. 74.Термическое устройство для печати изображений и текстов, термопринтер. 75.Термическое устройство для цветной печати изображений и текстов, принтер. 76.Устройство для видеозаписи изображений и текстов, видеомагнитофон. 77.Модем. 78.USB. 79.Бумага для принтеров, 5 рулонов в комплекте. 80.Устройство для инсталляции принтеров. 81.Педальный управляющий комплекс. 82.Дистанционный проводной управляющий комплекс. 83.Дистанционный беспроводной управляющий комплекс. 84.Гель для ультразвуковых исследований. 85.Руководство пользователя, прибор. 86.Руководство пользователя, датчики. 87.Расширенное руководство пользователя. 88.Устройство системного блока для модификации прибора. 89.Рабочая станция для сохранения и анализа данных. 90.Компьютер для объединения нескольких сканеров в сеть. 91.Компьютер-сервер для встраивания сканера в клинико-информационную сеть. 92.Источник бесперебойного питания (UPS). 93.Монитор для рабочей станции. 94.Дополнительная рукоятка для транспортировки. 95.Держатель кабелей датчиков. 96.Держатель для бумаг. 97.Дополнительная лампа освещения. 98.Дополнительная ручка для перевозки прибора. 99.Микрофон. 100.Дополнительный монитор. 101.Панель управления с кнопками. 102.Крышка системного блока. 103.Блок питания. 104.Соединительный кабель. 105.Компьютерный модуль с процессором. 106.Разъемы для подключения датчиков. 107.Шаровой манипулятор. 108.Программное обеспечение. 109.Панель управления с кнопками. 110.Ножной переключатель. 111.Соединительный кабель. 112.Разъем электрический. 113.Жесткий диск для архивации изображений. 114.Блок-модуль интерфейса связи. 115.Блок-модуль контроллера пульта управления. 116.Блок-модуль видеографического интерфейса. 117.Консоль сканера. 118.Кнопка для консоли. 119.Модуль управления. 120.Центральный процессор управления ультразвуковой частью. 121.Блок-модуль интерфейса консоли. 122.Блок-модуль обработки сигналов. 123.Коммутационный блок-модуль. 124.Блок-модуль формирования ультразвукового луча. 125.Блок-модуль мультиплексора. 126.Блок-модуль передатчика. 127.Блок-модуль приемника. 128.Блок-модуль коннекторов. 129.Модуль универсальный скрининговый ультразвуковой диагностический. 130.Сенсорный дисплей. 131.Блок низкого питания. 132.Блок высоковольтного питания. 133.Трансформаторный блок. 134.Блок распределения питания.
Наименование организации-заявителя медицинского изделия:	ООО «Центр сертификации и декларирования»
Место нахождения организации-заявителя медицинского изделия:	115162, Россия, г. Москва, ул. Шаболовка, д. 29, стр. 2
Наименование организации-производителя медицинского изделия или организации-изготовителя медицинского изделия:	ДжиИ Медикал Системз Израиль Лтд., Ультрасаунд
Место нахождения организации-производителя медицинского изделия или организации — изготовителя медицинского изделия:	, Израиль, , GE Medical Systems Israel Ltd., Ultrasound, 4 Etgar Street, Tirat Carmel, 39120, Israel
Код Общероссийского классификатора продукции для медицинского изделия:	94 4280
Класс потенциального риска применения медицинского изделия в соответствии с номенклатурной классификацией медицинских изделий, утверждаемой Министерством здравоохранения Российской Федерации:	2а

Источник

Quick Links

Related Manuals for GE Vivid S5

Summary of Contents for GE Vivid S5

Page 3: Table Of Contents

Page 17: Revision History

Page 19: Attention

Page 20: Principles Of Operation

Page 21: Indications For Use

Page 22: Manual Contents

Page 23: Conventions Used In This Manual

Page 24: Regulatory Requirements

Page 25: Contact Information

Page 31: Safety

Page 33: Introduction

Page 34: Hazard Symbols

Page 35: Owner Responsibility

Page 36: Important Safety Considerations

Page 37: Regulatory Information

Page 39: Certifications

Page 40: Device Labels

Page 41: Label Icon Description

Page 44: Acoustic Output

Page 45: Safety Statement

Page 47: Ob Exam

Page 48: Acoustic Output Considerations

Page 49: Patient Safety

Page 50: Patient Guidance

Page 51: Electrical Hazard

Page 52: Biological Hazards

Page 53: Personnel And Equipment Safety

Page 54: Smoke And Fire Hazard

Page 55: Lcd Monitor

Page 57: Electrical Safety

Page 58: Allergic Reactions To Latex-Containing Medical Devices

Page 59: Use Of Ecg

Page 60: Electromagnetic Compatibility (Emc)

Page 61: Emc Performance

Page 62: Declaration Of Emissions

Page 63: General Notice

Page 64: Peripheral Update For Ec Countries

Page 66: Patient Environmental Devices

Page 67: Acceptable Devices

Page 68: Environmental Protection

Page 69: Getting Started

Page 70: Introduction

Page 71: Preparing The Unit For Use

Page 72: Connecting The Unit

Page 79: Switching On/Off

Page 82: Moving And Transporting The Unit

Page 84: Transporting The Unit

Page 85: Reinstalling At A New Location

Page 86: Unit Acclimation Time

Page 87: System Description

Page 89: Control Panel

Page 102: The Scanning Screen

Page 105: Three-Pedal Footswitch Operation

Page 108: Adjusting The Display Monitor

Page 113: Starting An Examination

Page 118: Selecting A Probe And An Application

Page 121: Basic Scanning Operations

Page 122: Using The Assignable Keys Soft Menu

Page 125: Using The Soft Menu Rocker

Page 126: Trackball Operation

Page 127: The System Menu

Page 128: Cineloop Operation

Page 129: Cineloop Controls

Page 130: Using Cineloop

Page 131: Storing Images And Cineloops

Page 132: Removable Media

Page 133: Supported Removable Media

Page 138: Zoom

Page 139: Performing Measurements

Page 140: Physiological Trace

Page 144: Physio Controls

Page 146: Annotations

Page 149: To Edit Annotation

Page 150: Configuration Of The Pre-Defined Annotation List

Page 152: Bodymarks

Page 157: Introduction

Page 158: 2D-Mode